this file is provided free of charge from the who needs it ... · pdf filestart...
TRANSCRIPT
This file is provided FREE OF CHARGE from the electromaniacs.com community You are free to distribute this file to other persons who needs it , but without of charge Also on http://electromaniacs.com you can find thousands of service manuals , schematics free of charge
DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK
START TROUBLESHOOTING
TV startsfor a moment
with EHT (at least 1s)and attempts
3 starts.
ERROR CODE28 Signal by LED.
Short circuit TL71?sCollector to GROUND.
Horizontaldeflection
repair routine
Horizontaldeflection
repair routine
Verticaldeflection
repair routine
Verticaldeflection
repair routine
Check for open circuit
Open circuit DL74
Open circuit TL71
horizontal deflectionstage components.
Check safetycircuit components
TL71,72, etc.
Check BCL componentsCL09. DL09, CL08
TL02,TL59
TV now OK ?
TV now OK ?
Check DL75
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTIONREPAIR ROUTINE
Open circuit pin 8 IP95 orshort pin 4 of IP95 to GNDCheck the U-TIMER ~ 9vUSYS ~ 70v / 5VUP ~ 5v
+UA ~ 12v / U-VIDEO ~ 100v
No deflection problem!refer to power supply
OK?
Check H_Drivecomponents RL35,
RL36,TL31,TL32,TL33
Check H drive pulseon pin1 of LL32.
Connect pin 8 or removeshort on pin 4 of IP95.Short circuit TL34 B/E.
Short TL71 Col. to GND.Check for H_Drive onRV18, breifly visiable.
TV now OK ?
TV now OK ?
Go to 1
TV now OK ?
Open circuit either pin10 of the DST or JL60.
Check power supplyvoltage as again.
Check TL34 DL21,CL21 CL24, DST
Check Short TL34 B/E.Check retrace pulseon the collector TL34
(probe 100:1)
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
NoIV01repair routine
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK
OK?
OK?
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
1
Verticaldeflection
repair routine
Check DST output voltagesthese should be least at 50%of the nominal value. Check5VON, VSUPPLY,VRETRACE
Check for short circuit DSTsupply lines 5Vdst, Vsupply,Vretrace check TL34, LL32
Check Modulator components
Check the following, ZL11/13ZL14, DL11/13/14, TL14
Check flyback voltage on pin 8 of the DST.
Check DL09, DL19, DV09
Check the Line Flybackpulse (LFB) during start-up.
Briefly visible?
OK?
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
No
VERTICAL DEFLECTION STAGEREPAIR ROUTINE
NoIV01repair routine
V supplyand V retracewas OK or
>50% duringstart?
OK ?
OK ?
OK ?
OK ?
Vertival retrace visible on pin 7 IF01 during
start ?
Check the following items:-RL11/13, ZL11/13, DL11/13.
Check vertical guard signalon pin 34 of IV01, pulsewith U>4V during retrace
and <4V during scan visible.
Change IF01
NO vertical problem !!
Check Vetical Deflection IC pin resistance with TV "OFF"V supply (pin 3) > 5KOhm
V retrace (pin 6) > 50KOhmOutput A (pin 7) ~ 5,7KOhmOutput B (pin 4) ~ 5,7KOhm
Check pin 1 and 2 of IF01vertical amplifier during start-up.
At pin 1 approx. 3V DC and avisible sawtooth signal,on pin 2 approx. 3V DC.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
IV 01REPAIR ROUTINE
Is +8vpresent on
pins 23 & 53 ofIV01 at switch
"On" ?
+5Von pin 55
& 6,8V on pin 19IV01
Sawtoothsignal on pin 4
IV01 duringstart ?
Pin 58 <6v& pin 3 <3V
of IV01 duringstart ?
Check CC01,CI57 or IV01 defective.
Check RV01, CV03, RC02,CC03. Also check for short
circuits on IV01 supply pins?
Power supply or µP problem
IC not initialised or defect.Check crystals, bus protocol.
Check safety circuit andEHT compensation signal
IV01 defect. ?
I2C Bustransmissionvisible during
start ?
Bus blocked or µP problem
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
SECONDARY DC-VOLTAGES
11V
0,5A
U-VIDEO
U-SYS
+UA
U-TIMER
CHASSIS ICC17
+
DP82
DP84
DP80
DP93
All measurements in this chapter must be done WITHOUT the mains supply connected to the TV.Test circuit:The external voltage source is provided by a variable DC-power supply with its output voltage set to 11V and the current limitation set to 500mA's. The negative terminal of the DC-power supply must be directly connected to the chassis secondary ground plane.The positive terminal of the DC-power supply is first connected to an ammeter and then the anode of an isolation diode. The cathode of the isolation diode is then connected to the load on the chassis as shown below. Measure the current drawn by each load tested.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
STANDBY POWER SUPPLY - PRIMARY SIDE
230VAC atBP01 ?
CP10=310VDC
Check mainsplug-in &
mains switch
FP01 BlownCheck mainssupply filter &bridge rectifier
CathodeDP22=5.2V
CathodeDP20=42V
CheckIP20 pin 1
for a 62kHz signal
CP63=9.7V
Replace FP01& check TP50
& RP15
Check Standbyrectifier DP16-19RP20 and DP20
Check CP26and DP22
Replace IP20
Check TP21& LP20
Primary side ofStandby Power Supply
should be OK.
Short circuit pins 3 and 4of LP50 and switch
"ON" the mains supply.
Important information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you will have to change the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.
General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mains supply via an Isolation Transformer.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
DEGAUSSING CIRCUIT
No
No
Check degauss circuit.Switch "ON" the TV.
VoltageRP12 < 1.8V
Check whetherDP14 is
short circuit
Checkconnector BP15& posistor RP15
VoltageCP13 > 4.5V Check RP10
Check whetherDP14 is
open circuit
VoltageRP12 > 1.2V
CheckTP14 and TP15
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
SECONDARY DC-VOLTAGES
11V
0,5A
U-VIDEO
U-SYS
+UA
U-TIMER
CHASSIS ICC17
+
DP82
DP84
DP80
DP93
All measurements in this chapter must be done WITHOUT the mains supply connected to the TV.Test circuit:The external voltage source is provided by a variable DC-power supply with its output voltage set to 11V and the current limitation set to 500mA's. The negative terminal of the DC-power supply must be directly connected to the chassis secondary ground plane.The positive terminal of the DC-power supply is first connected to an ammeter and then the anode of an isolation diode. The cathode of the isolation diode is then connected to the load on the chassis as shown below. Measure the current drawn by each load tested.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Short circuit pins 3 & 4 ofLP50, short circuit CP69.
Switch"ON" mains supply
Checkvoltage acrossRP76 = 3.3V
Check the Keyboard PCB, DK01, CK02, GE01 (LED)
and GK01 (IR-receiver)
Checkvoltage acrossRP76 < 3.3V
voltage atcathode of IP61goes from > 5V
to < 2.5V
Check the connection tothe Keyboard and the
voltages on KDB17000
Check IP50and IP61
Regulation circuit OK.
Solder a 10Kresistor from CP63
to gate IP61
Cathode IP61 > 5V
Gate of IP61 < 2V
Check Standby rectifierDP16-19 and RP20
Replace IP61
Important information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you have to replace the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.
General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mainssupply via an Isolation Transformer.
After finishing this test, please remove the short circuitsfrom pins 3/4 of LP50 and CP69 also remove the 10k resistor.
STANDBY POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
No
Yes
Yes
POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : U-VIDEO
NoTestcurrent
>200mA?s
No short circuiton U-VIDEO
Remove the cableinserted at BL02(to CRT-board)
Check on CRT-board the video amplifier IB01,
DB30/31, DB50/51 & DB70/71.Reconnect cable in BL02
Replace DP82
Connect the test circuitto the cathode of DP82.
Testcurrent
>200mA?s
Important information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you have to replace the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.
General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mainssupply via an Isolation Transformer.
After finishing this test, please replace cable BL02 and remove the test circuit.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
No
Yes
Yes
POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : U-SYS
No No short circuiton U-SYS.
Replace DP80
Testcurrent
>500mA?s
RemoveJL60/LL60
Testcurrent
>500mA?sCheck TL34
Connect the test circuitto the cathode of DP80.
Important information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you have to replace the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.
General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mainssupply via an Isolation Transformer.
After finishing this test, please replace JL60/LL60 and remove the test circuit.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : U-TIMER
No No
Yes Yes
No No
Testcurrent
>200mA?s
Measure +8V rail(at pin 8 of IP95)
>1.3V Remove LL31
CheckDP93 and IP95
Connect pin 4 of IP95 to ground.Connect the test circuit to the
cathode of DP93.
Testcurrent
>200mA?s
Check line drivercircuit, TL32, etc.
Voltage at pin 9 of IP95
= 5.1V
Check +5VUPand 5V_VCC rails
Connect pins 4and 9 of IP95.
Testcurrent
>500mA?s
No short circuiton U-TIMER
Voltage at pin 8 of IP95
= 8.1V
Check voltage at pin 4 of IP95 andDP94 and CP96.
Check +8V railto AP, DP, OS,
SCART and KDBImportant information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you have to replace the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.
General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mainssupply via an Isolation Transformer.
After finishing this test, please replace LL31, remove thelink between pins 4 and 9 of IP95 and remove the test circuit.www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
No
Yes
Yes
POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : +UA
No
No
Testcurrent
>200mA?s
No short circuiton +UA rail.
Remove JP03
Remove DP84
Connect pin 4 of IP95 to ground.
Connect the test circuit tothe cathode of DP84.
Testcurrent
>200mA?s
Replace AudioAmplifier IS80.
Testcurrent
>200mA?sReplace DP84
Check IP87
Check U-TIMER rail.
Important information:If the over-voltage circuit was activated,you have to replace the fuse resistor atlocation RB/LB06 on the CRT-board.
General: All measurements must betaken with the TV connected to the mainssupply via an Isolation Transformer.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
100U0CA119
100U0CA118
10U0CA113
10U0CA112
470U0CA109
4U7CA008
4U7CA007
4U7CA003
4U7CA004
1MI0CA043
1MI0CA054
100U0CA078
100U0CA074
100U0CA080
220U0CA105
1U0CA103
1U0CA104
470U0CA044
470U0CA053
4U7CA093
4U7CA092
1U0CA094
1U0CA095
470U0CA035
1MI0CA032
1U0CA024
4U7CA014
4U7CA013
1U0CA016
1U0CA015
470U0CA036
1MI0CA031
1U0CA023
470R0RA105
4R7RA042
22K0RA047
22K0RA040
4R7RA049
4R7RA041
4R7RA050
22K0RA039
22K0RA048
BA004
12345
1K0RA118
1K0RA119
47K0RA111
47K0RA109
120K0RA107
470R0RA008
470R0RA007
100K0RA005
100K0RA006
100K0RA002
100K0RA001
470R0RA003
470R0RA004
22K0RA076
1K0RA056
1K0RA045
1K0RA055
1K0RA046
10K0RA070
10K0RA071
6K8RA112 10K0
RA114
10K0RA1156K8
RA113
33R0RA116
33R0RA117
120K0RA106
100K0RA150
BA00511121314
BA005789
10
AM/DP.17000.00 1N0CA106
1N0CA107
1N0CA005
1N0CA006
1N0CA002
1N0CA001
22N0CA058
1N0CA115
1N0CA114
1N0CA101
1N0CA102
22N0CA061
22N0CA064
22N0CA060
1N0CA056
1N0CA045
1N0CA091
1N0CA090
470P0CA097
470P0CA096
1N0CA012
470P0CA017
470P0CA018
1N0CA011
LL4148DA071
LL4148DA070
LL4148DA075
LL4148DA074
BC857BTA080
BA00812
BA00912
BA00612
BA00712
100N0CA034
100N0CA033
LL4148DA073
LL4148DA083
BZX55C3V6DA024
BZX55C3V6DA023
+
-IN-
IN+OUT
VCC
VEE
IA003
6
57
8
4
+
-IN-
IN+OUT
VCC
VEEMC33076/P1
2
31
8
4
4K7RA093
10K0RA072
120K0RA073
4K7RA074
22K0RA077
1K2RA078
10K0RA079
120MI0RA080
6K8RA082
5K6RA083
5K6RA081
100R0RA0281K0
RA032
15K0RA024
10K0RA026
18K0RA030
15K0RA029
1K0RA096
1K0RA097
100R0RA027
1K0RA031
18K0RA022
560R0RA037
560R0RA036
4K7RA094
15K0RA023
18K0RA025
4K7RA014
4K7RA013
4K7RA015
4K7RA095
4K7RA016
560R0RA035
560R0RA038
18K0RA021
1K0RA017
1K0RA018
4K7RA092
BC847BTA077
BC847BTA072
BC847BTA022
BC847BTA021
100N0CA042
100N0CA049
100N0CA041
100N0CA050
TDA7269IA002
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
11
TDA7269IA001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10
11
BA001BS003
BS02
1
1
23456789
10
10
BA005
4 5 6
BA005
1 2 3
SA001
1
2
3
4
5
6
BA002
11
233
Heatsink
GndRight
Left
Mute
Right
Left
Headphones
Cinch output Cinch output
Left Right
GND+ UA
Surround
Center R
Center L
Center
Center
Headph LHeadph R
Mute Surr.
Mute L/R
Surround
Surround
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Surround
Left
Left
Left
Right
Right
Right
SUB AMDP
ICC17
AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC
AMDP
AUDIO SIGNAL MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC - MODULE AUDIO DOLBY PROLOGIC - DOLBY PROLOGIC VERSTÄRKER - MODULO AUDIO DOLBY PROLOGIC ESQUEMA DEL MÕDULO AMPLIFICADOR DE AUDIO
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
I2C
CL
I2C
DA
AGND
DGND
+5VA
+5VDDGND
RES
ETQ
+8V
AGND
DA
CM
C
DA
CM
SU
B
DA
CC
2L
DA
CM
SU
RR
AGND
+8V
AN
AIN
-
AGND
AGND
AN
AIN
1+
AGND
AD
RS
EL
AG
ND
+5V
A
+8V
+5VD
DGND
+5V
D
AN
AIN
2+
DGND +5VD
DGND
MO
NO
IN
VR
EFTO
P
SC
1IN
RS
C1IN
L
SC
2IN
R
SC
2IN
L
SC
3IN
RS
C3IN
L
CA
PLM
CA
PLA
SC
1O
UTL
SC
1O
UTR
SC
2O
UTL
SC
2O
UTR
AG
ND
C
SC
4IN
R
DGND
XTA
LO
UT
XTA
LIN
220N0CS201
CS21010U0
CS202
10N0
CS
207
100N
0
1N0
CS106
CS105
100N0
10N0
CS104
1N0
CS103
10N0CS102
10U0CS211
220N0CS101
10U
0C
S206
CS203
1N0
CS205
100N0
Rig
ht
Subw
oofe
r
Cente
r
Mute
L/R
Surr
ound
Mute
Surr
.
Headph L
Headph R
SC
4IN
L
64 33
10N0
CS204
1 32Left
AGND
DA
CM
L
DA
CM
R
DC
TR
OU
T1
DC
TR
OU
T0
DA
CA
LD
AC
AR
1
111213141516171819
2
2021222324252627
28
29
3
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4
40
41
42
43
44
45
46474849
5
50515253545556575859
6
6061
64
65
66
67
68
69 770
71
72 8 9
AVSUP
STANDBYQ
TESTEN
ADRSELDCTROUT0DCTROUT1
AUDCLOUTDMACSYNC
XTALOUTXTALIN
ANAIN2+ANAIN-
ANAIN1+AVSUP
AHVSSCAPLMAHVSUPAVHSUPCAPLASC1OUTLSC1OUTRVREF1VREF1SC2OUTLSC2OUTRASG3TESTNEUDACMSUBDACMLDACMRVREF2VREF2
AVSS
AVSS
MON
OIN
VREF
TOP
VREF
TOP
SC1I
NRSC
1INL
ASG0
SC2I
NRSC
2INL
ASG1
SC3I
NRSC
3INL
ASG3
SC4I
NRSC
4INL
AGND
CAH
VSS
DVSU
P
I2CC
LI2
CDA
I2SC
LI2
SWS
I2SD
AOU1
I2SD
AIN1
ADRD
A
ADRW
SAD
RCL
DVSU
P
DVSS
DVSS
I2SD
AIN2
RESE
TQDA
CAR
DACA
L
NP
NP
NPNPNP
106263
71
72
65
66
67
68
69
70 6541 2 3 7 8 9
MSP3410D(DIE)
IS100
CS
209
100N
0
3U
3C
S208
AGND
1
BS001
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
32
BS002
31
9 10
10
8654321
1
BS003
1
TP2
1 TP1
7PINS of MSP
PINS of MSP
DGND
1011121314151617181920212223242526
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
4546474849
5
5051525354555657585960
61
62
64
65
66
67 8
STANDBYQVREF2 ADRSEL
AUDCLOUT
XTALOUTXTALINTESTEN
AVSUP
SC1OUTLSC1OUTRVREF1VREF1SC2OUTLSC2OUTRASG3
VREF2
AHVS
S
27
AVSU
PAV
SSAV
SSM
ONOI
NVR
EFTO
PVR
EFTO
PSC
1INR
SC1I
NLAS
G1SC
2INR
SC2I
NLAS
G2SC
3INR
SC3I
NLAG
NDC
AHVS
S
44
NP
NPNPNP
7 963 2 3 4 6
I2CC
LI2
CDA
I2SC
LI2
SWS
I2SD
AOU1
I2SD
AIN1
NPDVSU
PDV
SUP
DVSS
DVSS
I2SD
AIN2
RESE
TQI2
SDAO
U2
68 1
NC NC NC
DACC2RDACC2L
DACC1RDACC1L
CAPLC2AHVSUPAHVSUP
DCTRIO0DCTRIO1
DCTRIN
NCNCNC
CAPLC1
168 643263 97 867
66
65
64
62
61 5
DPL3518(DIE)
IS200
DGND
+5VD
SUB AMDP 17001 00
AMDPBA001
SUB AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC
SUB AMDP
5558
SUB AUDIO SIGNAL MODULE - SUB MODULE AUDIO - AUDIO SIGNAL SUBMODUL - SUB MODULO AUDIO
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GND
OUT
Vss
GK01
12 3
TFMK1330-D-T
DK01BZX55C5V1
SK031 2
3 4
GE01
1
23
LU5351-JM
A2
A1C
JK01
RE03
100R0RK02
270R0
RK011K0
CK0222U0
DE01BZX55C2V7
SK021 2
3 4
SK041 2
3 4
SK011 2
3 4
JK02
BK01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Vol-
Vol+
PR+
PR-
KEYB_A
U_STBY
+8V
IR
+5V_STBY
KEY_IN_2
KEYB_B
KEY_IN_1
KDB 17000 00
16VR
G
BJ10
1
2
3
4
5
6
BQ09
1
2
3
4
5
CJ2022P0
470P0CQ06
BQ12
1
2
345
78 RQ05
330R0RQ01
330R0RQ03
330R0
RQ04330R0
RQ02330R0
RQ06 330R0
CQ043N3
CQ033N3
CJ011U0
CJ021U0
CQ0210U0
CQ0110U0
CJ05NI
CJ04470P0
CJ03470P0
BJ04123456
FCB.17000.00
RJ0347K0
RJ0675R0
RJ05220R0
RJ20220R0
RJ0447K0
RJ2175R0
470P
0CQ
05
BJ111
2
3
45
R
L
CHROMA
FCB-GND
VIDEO
FCB 17001 00
L
L
R
R
R
LAUDIO
VIDEO
CHROMA.
VIDEO
KEY BOARD AND FRONT CONNECTOR BOARDMODULE PRISE EN FACADE ET INTERCONNEXION DU CLAVIER
TASTATUR UND FRONT ANSCHLUSSPLATTE - PIASTRA CONNESSIONE PLACA TECLADO Y CONECTORES FRONTALES
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GENERAL INFORMATION - LED BEHAVIOUR
LED FLASHES
Message transmission.The Error codes are signalled by the TV’s red LED.
Count the number of flashes : error code is two burst seperated by a pause of 0.7sec. and repeated four times..There is 1.7 sec. between each codes sequence .
orange pause
green pause
green
orange
red pause
off
0,7 sec. 1,7 sec.
2 4
3 4
0,7 sec.
0,7 sec.
1,7 sec.
1,7 sec.
250ms250ms
0,7 sec. 1,7 sec.
off pause
red
CODES DEFAUTS
IC TDA8855H DOES NOT ANSWER14
AUDIO PROCESSOR NO LONGER RESPONDING.15
SDA LINE BEING HELD LOW21
CLOCK JAMMED AT LOW LEVEL, SCL LINE JAMMED AT LOW LEVEL.23
SWITCHED 5V NOT AVAILABLE25
TUBE DOES NOT GET WARM IN TIME26
THE DETECTION SYSTEM HAS DETECTED PROTECTION ON MORE THAN THREE OCCASIONS(DOES THIS MEAN THAT A PROBLEM HAS BEEN DETECTED ON THE BREATING LINE?).
27
SCANNING PROBLEM AFTER 2 S, THE PROGRAM TRIES TO PERFORM A START.28
THE NVM CHIP DOES NOT ANSWER 34
WRONG NVRAM ADDRESS PASSED TO THE BUS-HANDLER36
UNEXPECTED LEVEL ON NMI (INTERRUPT) LINE FOUND (POSSIBLE CAUSE : TUBE FLASHOVER)37
BUS (DATA LINE) NOT RECOVERABLE41
currently all known ICC17 TV sets are fitted with a Bicoloured LED, the red part is the Standby LED whilst, the green part is directly connected to the switched +8V supply. Therefore,the colour of the LED will depend upon the state of this voltage,the chart below gives the corresponding LED-colours:
LED-port switched +8V off on
on green orangeoff off red
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
+USYS: System voltage
+U_VIDEO: Video drive voltage for the CRT board
+ STDBY_ ON: Standby data (0V standby , 0.6v switched ON)
+5V DST: 5v unregulated voltage from the DST
to supply the tuner and audio MSP device
+5V ON: 5v regulated voltage from the DSTto supply the tuner and audio MSP device
+5V UP : Microprocessor supply voltage
BCL: Beam current limiting information
CVBS: Composite video / luminance signal
CVBS_OUT: Composite video output
CVBS_TXT: Composite video for teletext extraction
DEGAUSS: Degauss signal
EW : East / West
FORMAT / BC: Full white control DATA depending on16/9 selected format
HDRV: Horizontal deflection signal
HTR1 / HTR2: Heater voltage from the DST to CRT PCB
LFB: Line Fast Blanking
MUTE : Mutes audio amplifiers
PO: “Power ON “ IP95 : reset activated and output = 8v“PO” = 5v when TV is working in normally
POWER_FAIL: Detection of mains supply and deflection stage failures
RESET: Microprocessor reset signal
SAFETY: Safety information from the deflection stage
SCL: Serial Clock
SDA : Serial Data
SIF: Sound IF
TRAP_INFO: 31.4Mhz IF trap activation
U_ STANDBY: Standby voltage
U_DRIVER: Horizontal sync signal from TDA8855H
U_TIMER: 11v voltage used during “Switch ON “ phaseand “Wake Up“ mode
V FLB: Vertical flyback reference for the microprocessor
V GUARD: Safety data generated by the vertical amplifierTDA 8351
V_RETRACE: 42 / 48volts (depending on tube type) generated bythe DST and used for vertical blanking
V_SUPPLY: 13.5 to 15.5 volts (depending on tube type) generated by the DST
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS - LISTE DES ABREVIATIONS- ABKÜRZUNGENLISTA DELLE ABBREVIAZIONI - LISTA DE ABREVIACIONES
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
1
1716
32
MX27C200MC-12
MPS3400C-PP-C6
TDA 8139
ST24C08-MTS3702CD
MC7812/CTBT806 -600CSTP6 NA60F1
B C E
BC 847BBC 857BBCR141BCR191
DTC113ZKDTC144EK
TN1401
BF 422BF423
2SA1020Y2SC2236Y
BC 337BC 546BBC 547B
BD241C
E B C
E
BC
MPS750
TDA8351
BUH516TH16
33
32 14
13
16453
52
TDA8855H
ST92R195
1 24
25
40
4164
65
80
8109
11
1 2
5 6
3 4
7
TDA7269
1 25
7
9
3
46
8
TDA6107Q
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND TRANSISTORS OUTLINE - CIRCUITS INTEGRES ET TRANSISTORS
INTEGRIERTE SCHALTUNGEN UND TRANSISTOREN - CIRCUITI INTEGRATI TRANSISTOR
CIRCUITOS INTEGRADOS Y TRANSISTORES
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
Audio baseband processing of the MSP3410
SCA RT 1SCA RT 2SCA RT 3MONO
FM
NICA M
SBUS12
SBUS34
I2S
DC-FM1
DC-FM2OFF 50u N
J17
J17
J17
SC1 OUT
SC2 OUTA
QP L
A
A
AEFFECT S LS OUT
BEEP
HP OUT
I2S OUT
QP R
17 16
S_DA
_OUT
S_DA
_IN
S_CL
S_ID
I2S_
DA_O
UT
I2S_
DA_I
N
I2S_
CL
I2S_
WS
SBUS Interface
SCART Switching Facilities
IDENT
FM1
FM1
LS L
S1..4
I2S L/R
LS R
Headphone L
Headphone R
Scart_L
Scart_RScart_L
Scart_R
SC1_OUT_L
SC1_OUT_R
SC2_OUT_L
SC2_OUT_R
DACA_L
DACA_R
DACN_L
DACN_R
FM2NICAM1NICAM2
I2S Interface
DEMODULATOR
Sound IF
A/DA/D
D/A
D/A
D/A
D/A
D/A
D/A
DFP
MSP3410ANA_IN1+
ANA_IN2+
Sound IF
SC1_IN_L
SC1_IN_R
SC2_IN_L
SC2_IN_R
SC3_IN_L
SC3_IN_R
Mono_IN
58
60
55
52
53
50
49
46
47
1520 13 14 11 12
26
25
29
34
33
28
37
36
Detection part of the MSP 3410
IDENT A MDemodu-
lation
StereoDetection
Filter
BilingualDetection
Filter
LevelDetect
LevelDetect
StereoDetectionRegister
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS BLOCK DIAGRAMS - SYNOPTIQUES INTERNES DES CIRCUITS INTEGRES - INTEGRIERTE SCHALTUNGEN BLOCKSCHALTBILDER
SCHEMA A BLOCCHI DEI CIRCUITI INTEGRATI - VISTA INTERNA DE LOS CIRCUITOS INTEGRADOS
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
VIF AMPLIFIER + PLL DEMOD
AGC FOR IF+ TUNER
POL
TOP
SCLTUNER SDA+8V
AFC
IDENTIF.
I2C - BUSTRANSCEIVER
SYNC SEP.+1st LOOP
VCO+CONTROL
2nd LOOP HOR. OUT
EW - GEOMETRYHOR. OUT
AGC
AM
OU
T
INT
ER
CA
RR
. O
UT
PAL/NTSCSECAM
DECODER
BASE-BANDDELAY LINE
RGB-2 INPUTRGB/YUVMATRIX
CD MATRIXSAT. CONTROL
SKIN TINT
AFC VIDEOAMPLIFIER
CONTROLDAC's
VERICAL SYNC.SEPARATOR
H / VDIVIDER
VERTICALGEOMETRY
VIDEO IDENT VIDEO MUTE
CHROM TRAP+ BANDPASS
FILTERTUNING
CONTINUOUSCATHODE
CALIBRATOR
RGB CONTROLBLUE STRETCH
OUTPUT
SIFAMPLIFIER
QSS MIXERAM DEMOD.
CVBS Y/CSWITCH
CVBS
CV
BS
IN
CV
BS
OU
T
CV
BS
OU
T
CV
BS
/YC
HR
.
SOUNDTRAP
SWITCH
LUMA DELAYPEAKINGCORING
BLACK STRETCHRGB MATRIX
BLACK CURR.
BEAM CURR.
V-DRIVE
H-DRIVE
EHT
EW
RGB-1 INPUT
1
15
22
10 27 11 16 2924 54 26 20 21 53 51 50 55 49 41
R2Fsc G2 B2 BL2
42 43 44 40 45 39
35
30
34
31
32
33
63
3
62
565718 59 28 25 61 19 581771413 6
64
R1
R
G
B
G1
B1
BL1
36
37
38
4746
60
8
9
2
MUTE
IF - IN
SIF - IN
SW.OUT
SW
SW
SAT
REF
WH
ITE
P
BR
I
CO
NT
R.
HUE
SW.OUT
5323
V U Y
TDA8855H
IV01 TDA 8855H
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
BLOCKDIAGRAM: audio module dolby prologic
I A 0 0 13
6
2
47
1 1
Mute Circuit
SA 0 0 1
BA005a
BA007
BA006
BA005a
IA0023
6
2
47
11
Mute Circuit
+ Us
Left
Right
BA005b
BA008/BA009
I A 0 0 3
B A 0 0 4
BA005c
Ex t ernal speaker
Internal speaker
Ex t ernal speaker
Internal speaker
Surround
Center
Headphones
Subwoofer
5
5
+ Us
Cur rent L imi ter
Surround
L& R
BA005d
Lef t
Right
Surround
Center
Subwoofer
Headphones L& R
M ute_surr
M ute_L/ R
M ute
+ U a
GND
B A 0 0 2
B A 0 0 1
BLOCK DIAGRAM (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC) SCHEMA SYNOPTIQUE (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC) BLOCKSCHALTBILD (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC)SCHEMA A BLOCCI (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC)
ESQUEMA DE BLOQUES (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC)
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
+5V
IIC Bus
RESET MSP
+8V
SIF
AV1 in
AV2 in
AV3 in
AM AF
MSP 3410 D
2
AV1 out
AV2 out
2
2
2
IIC Bus DPL 3520
RESETQ
+5V
IISBus
Dolby Prologic COB(IS40)
Left
Right
Headphone Left
Headphone Right
Mute L/R
Mute Surround
Center
Surround
Subwoofer
BS003Clock
Block diagram Dolby Prologic
+5V
IIC Bus
RESET MSP
+8V
SIF
AV1 in
AV2 in
AV3 in
AM AF
MSP 3410 D
Headphones
Loudspeakers2
AV1 out
AV2 out
MuteCircuit
MUTE+UA
TDA 7269
2
2
2 2
2
2 22
2
IIC Bus DPL 3518
RESETQ
+5V
IISBus
Virtual DolbyCOB
Block diagram Virtual Dolby
Demod.
A/D
D/A
D/A
RightLeft
Left Right
Headphone
Loudspeaker
IF inputI2S out
D/A
D/A
SurroundNot
Center Subwoofer
Channel 1
Channel 2
Used
I2S1 in
AM and I2S1 in I2S out
Audio_clockMS P 3410 D DP L 3520 A
Scart in
SwitchingPart
I/O
Mute L/R Mute Surr
DSP
(Dolby + effect)
Interface requirement audio part with Dolby Prologic
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
120 130 140 150 160 170 180110
210
310
410
510
610
710
810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880
720 730 740 750 760 770 780
620 630 640 650 660 670 680
520 530 540 550 560 570 580
420 430 440 450 460 470 480
320 330 340 350 360 370 380
220 230 240 250 260 270 280
CHARGING PROBLEM DISPLAY FUNCTION PROBLEM ABNORMAL NOISE REMOTE CONTROL PROBLEM PHYSICAL DAMAGE GENERAL FUNCTION PROBLEM SPECIAL REQUIREMENTSPOWER PROBLEM
NO RECEPTION
NO PICTURE
NO COLOUR
NO AUDIO
NO MECHANICAL OPERATION
NO DATA PROCESSING
NO PRINTER OPERATION ERRONEOUS PRINTER POOR PRINT QUALITY NOISY PRINTING UNSTABLE PRINTER OPERATION RIBBON/PAPER PROBLEMS FAULTY FONT/CHARACTER
FAULTY DATA PROCESSING DATA DISPLAY PROBLEM DATA READ/WRITE PROBLEM SPECIAL DATA PROCESSING
IRREGULAR MECHANICAL SPEED PROBLEM MECHANICAL NOISE DAMAGE TO SOFTWARE MECHANICAL OPERATION LENS PROBLEM
AUDIO LEVEL PROBLEM AUDIO QUALITY NOISY AUDIO UNSTABLE AUDIO POOR AUDIO RECORDING POOR SPECIAL AUDIO STEREO/MULTI MODE
COLOUR LEVEL PROBLEM POOR COLOUR QUALITY NOISY COLOUR UNSTABLE COLOUR POOR COLOUR RECORDING SPECIAL COLOUR FUNCTION
PICTURE LEVEL PROBLEM PICTURE QUALITY PROBLEM PICTURE NOISE UNSTABLE PICTURE POOR PICTURE RECORDING SPECIAL PICTURE FUNCTION PICTURE DISPLAY/PICKUP
POOR RECEPTION TRANSMISSION PROBLEM NOISY RECEPTION/ UNSTABLE RECEPTION/ TUNING PROBLEM SPECIAL COMMUNICATION SPECIAL RECEPTION PROBLEM
12112212X
131132 133 134 135 136 137 138 13913X
141142 143 144 145 14614X
151152 153
15415X
161162 163 164 165 166 167 168 16916A 16B
16C16X
171172 173 174 175 176 177
17817X
181182 183 184 185 18618X18Z
111112 113 114
115116 117
11811911A 11B 11X
211212 213 214 215 216 217 218 21921X
311312 313 314 315 316 31731X
411412 413 41441X
511512 51351X
611612 613 614 615 616 617 618 61961A 61X
711712 713 714 715 716
71771871X
811812813
821
822
831832833
84184284X
851852853
861862863
881882883
721722 723 724 725 726
72772872X
731732 733 734
735736 73773X
761762 76376X
771772 77377X
621622 623 624
625626
627628 62962A 62X
63163263X
641642 643 644 645 646 64764X
661662 663 664 665 666 66766X
671672 673 674 675 676 677 678 67967A 67X
681682 683 68468X
521522 523 524 52552X
531532 533 53453X
541542 543 544 545 546 547 54854X
551552 553 554 555 55655X
561562 563
56456556X
571572 573 574 575 576 577 57857X
581582 583
58458558X
42142242X
431432 433 434 435 436 437 43843X
441
44244X
451452 453 45445X
46146X
47147247X
321322 323 324 325 326 32732X
331332 333 334 335 336 337 338 33933A 33X
341342 343 344 345 346 347 34834X
351352 353 354
355356 357 358
35935A 35B 35X
361362 363
364365 366
36X
371372 373
374375
376377 378 37937A 37B 37X
381382 383 384
38538X
221222 223 224 225 226 227 228 22922X
231232 233 234
235
23X
241242 24324X
25125225X
261262 263 26426X
271272 273 274 275 276 277 27827X
281282 283 284 285 286 287 28828X
NO BATTERY CHARGINGINCOMPLETE BATTERY CHARGE OTHER CHARGING PROBLEM
FAULTY TIMER/COUNTER DISPLAYFAULTY LAMP/LED OPERATION FAULTY LEVEL METER OPERATION FAULTY ON-SCREEN DISPLAY OPERATION ELECTRONIC TUNING DISPLAY FAULT MECHANICAL TUNING DISPLAY FAULT FAULTY TIME CODE DISPLAY FAULTY ALARM/ERROR DISPLAY DISPLAY DIM OTHER DISPLAY FUNCTION PROBLEM
CRT DISCHARGING NOISEEHT DISCHARGING NOISE NOISY CABINET NOISY TRANSFORMER NOISY COMPONENT(S) RATTLE OTHER ABNORMAL NOISE
NO REMOTE CONTROL OPERATIONINCORRECT REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING/LEARNING MODE PROBLEMPOOR REMOTE CONTROL SENSITIVITY OTHER REMOTE CONTROL PROBLEM
DAMAGED CABINETDAMAGED HANDLE DAMAGED CONTROL KNOB(S)/BUTTON(S) DAMAGED DOOR/COVER DAMAGED SEAL DAMAGED PLUG OR SOCKET DAMAGED LENS DAMAGED CARTRIDGE OR STYLUS DAMAGED ANTENNA DAMAGED CRT OR VIEWFINDER MISSING COMPONENT(S) OR ORNAMENTALPARTSPRINTED MARKINGS ERASED/PEELED OFF OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE
FAULTY CLOCK FUNCTIONFAULTY SLEEP FUNCTION FAULTY TIMER PROGRAMMING FAULTY TIMER RECORDING SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING PROBLEM FAULTY RECORD MUTE OPERATION FAULTY PROGRAMMED PLAYBACKOPERATIONFAULTY MEMORY FUNCTION OTHER GENERAL FUNCTION PROBLEM
TEST AND CHECKGENERAL OVERHAUL SYSTEM/FREQUENCY CONVERSION INITIAL SETUP REQUESTED MODIFICATION/CIRCUIT CHANGE WRONG SET IN CARTON OTHER SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS SYMPTOM NOT AVAILABLE
NO POWER ON ACNO POWER WHEN USING AC-ADAPTER NO POWER WHEN USING DRY BATTERIES NO POWER WHEN USING RECHARGEABLEBATTERIESNO POWER FROM SOLAR CELL NO POWER WHEN USING A CAR BATTERY SHORT OPERATION TIME/SHORT BATTERYLIFEPOWER-OFF FUNCTION NOT WORKING NO SWITCH-ON FROM STANDBY POWERS UP, BUT NO OPERATION CYCLIC POWER ON/OFF OTHER POWER PROBLEM
POOR AM RECEPTIONPOOR FM RECEPTION POOR SW RECEPTION POOR VHF RECEPTION POOR UHF RECEPTION POOR BS RECEPTION POOR CS RECEPTION POOR HDTV RECEPTION POOR QPS RECEPTION OTHER 'POOR RECEPTION' PROBLEM
NO TRANSMISSIONPOOR TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION LEVEL TOO HIGH NO TRANSMISSION BETWEEN BASE UNITAND HANDSETPOOR TRANSMISSION BETWEEN BASE UNITAND HANDSETOTHER TRANSMISSION PROBLEM
LINE NOISEOSCILLATION INTERSTATION INTERFERENCE OTHER NOISE RECEPTION/TRANSMISSIONPROBLEM
TUNING DRIFTFADING OTHER UNSTABLE RECEPTION/TRANSMISSION PROBLEM
MANUAL TUNING PROBLEMAUTOMATIC TUNING PROBLEM INCORRECT TUNING TUNING MEMORY PROBLEM OTHER TUNING PROBLEM
FAULTY DIALLINGFAULTY CHANNEL SELECTION FAULTY AUTO-ANSWER OPERATION FAULTY MESSAGE READ-OUT FUNCTION FAULTY AUTODIAL MEMORY FAULTY SPEECH PROCESSING NO RINGING TONE WEAK RINGING TONE OTHER SPECIAL COMMUNICATIONPROBLEM
FAULTY STEREO RECEPTIONFAULTY MAIN CHANNEL (A) FUNCTION FAULTY SUB-CHANNEL (B) FUNCTION FAULTY SSB RECEPTION FAULTY RDS/VPS OPERATION FAULTY TELETEXT RECEPTION FAULTY SATELLITE/RTTY RECEPTION FAULTY FAX OPERATION OTHER SPECIAL RECEPTION PROBLEM
NO AM RECEPTIONNO FM RECEPTION NO SW RECEPTION NO VHF RECEPTION NO UHF RECEPTION NO BS RECEPTION NO CS RECEPTION NO HDTV RECEPTION NO QPS RECEPTION OTHER 'NO RECEPTION' PROBLEM
NO PICTURE IN E TO E MODENO PICTURE IN PLAYBACK MODE NO PICTURE IN VIEWFINDER NO PICTURE, ONLY RASTER NO RASTER, BLACK PICTURE ONLY HORIZONTAL LINE ONLY VERTICAL LINE OTHER 'NO PICTURE' PROBLEM
NO COLOUR IN E TO E MODENO COLOUR IN PLAYBACK MODE NO COLOUR IN VIEWFINDER NO COLOUR IN PART OF PICTURE OTHER 'NO COLOUR' PROBLEM
NO SOUND IN E TO E MODENO PLAYBACK OF OUTGOING MESSAGE(S) NO PLAYBACK OF INCOMING MESSAGE(S) OTHER 'NO AUDIO' PROBLEM
NO DISC ROTATIONNO FORWARD OPERATION NO REVERSE OPERATION NO FAST FORWARD OR REWIND FUNCTION NO LOADING NO UNLOADING OR EJECTING OF TAPE NO AUTO SHUT-OFF OPERATION TONEARM DOES NOT MOVE DISC NOT BEING EJECTED MAGAZINE DOES NOT EJECT OTHER 'NO MECHANICAL OPERATION'PROBLEM
NO INITIAL SCREENSYSTEM DOES NOT RESET SYSTEM DOES NOT BOOT UP NO OPERATION FROM PLUG-IN MODULE NO KEYBOARD OPERATION NO OPERATION FROM OTHERINPUT/OUTPUTNO DATA STORAGE OPERATION NO DATA COMMUNICATION OTHER 'NO DATA PROCESSING' PROBLEM
NOT PRINTINGNO COMMUNICATION WITH PRINTERPAPER NOT LOADING
814 NO PAPER FEED815 NO IMAGE FIXATION81X OTHER NO PRINTER OPERATION PROBLEM
PRINT IMAGE REVERSED (NEGATIVE/POSITIVE)IRREGULAR PAPER FEED
823 ERRONEOUS PRINT MODE SWITCHING82X OTHER PRINTER OPERATION PROBLEM
INCORRECT PRINTING POSITIONLOW PRINT CONTRASTEXCESSIVE PRINT CONTRAST
834 BLURRED PRINT IMAGE835 PRINT IMAGE NOT SHARP836 DOTS MISSING-IN PRINT IMAGE83X OTHER PRINT QUALITY PROBLEM
PRINTING NOISE LINESDIRTY PRINTINGOTHER NO I S Y P R I N T I N G PROBLEM
UNSTABLE PAPER LOADINGUNSTABLE MULTI-PAPER LOADINGINCORRECT LINE
85X OTHER UNSTABLE PRINTER OPERATION PROBLEM
-UP OF CHARACTERS
RIBBON BROKENRIBBON STUCK/STICKINGRIBBON DERAILED
864 PAPER STUCK/STICKING TO MECHANISM865 PAPER JAM86X OTHER RIBBON/PAPER PROBLEM
INCORRECT CHARACTERSINCORRECT CHARACTER SIZEFONT LOADING PROBLEM
88X OTHER FAULTY FONT/CHARACTER FUNCTION PROBLEM
INCORRECT DATASYSTEM RESET WHILE BEING USED SYSTEM LOCKS OUT/CRASHES FAULTY OPERATION OF PLUG-IN MODULE FAULTY KEYBOARD OPERATION FAULTY OPERATION OF OTHERINPUT/OUTPUTFAULTY DATA STORAGE OPERATION FAULTY DATA COMMUNICATION OTHER 'FAULTY DATA PROCESSING'PROBLEM
INCORRECT CHARACTER DISPLAYMISSING DISPLAY CHARACTERS FAULTY GRAPHIC DISPLAY FAULTY SWITCHING BETWEEN GRAPHIC/CHARACTER MODEFAULTY PROMPT/CURSOR OPERATION DATA DISPLAY COLOUR INCORRECT NO PAGING OR SCROLL MODE OTHER DATA DISPLAY PROBLEM
FORMATTING PROBLEMDATA ON STORAGE MEDIUM BEING LOST FRAME MEMORY PROBLEM OTHER DATA READ/WRITE PROBLEM
FAULTY SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODEFAULTY WORD PROCESSING FUNCTION FAULTY GRAPHIC EDIT FUNCTION OTHER 'SPECIAL DATA FUNCTION' PROBLEM
IRREGULAR ROTATIONIRREGULAR FORWARD MODE IRREGULAR REVERSE OPERATION IRREGULAR FAST FORWARD OR REWINDFUNCTIONIRREGULAR LOADING IRREGULAR UNLOADING OR EJECTING OFTAPEIRREGULAR AUTO SHUT-OFF OPERATION IRREGULAR TONEARM MOVEMENT IRREGULAR EJECTION OF DISC IRREGULAR DIRECTION CHANGE OTHER 'IRREGULAR MECHANICALOPERATION' PROBLEM
SPEED TOO FASTSPEED TOO SLOW OTHER SPEED PROBLEM
ROTATION NOISEMOTOR NOISE WIND NOISE TAPE SQUEALING FAN NOISE DISC SCRAPING NOISY TAPE LOADING OTHER MECHANICAL NOISE PROBLEM
TAPE GETS SCRATCHEDDISC GETS SCRATCHED TAPE GETS CHEWED/WRINKLED TAPE JAMMED OR BROKEN TAPE GETS CURLED SLACK TAPE TAPE STICKING OTHER SOFTWARE DAMAGE PROBLEM
FAULTY START/STOP OPERATIONFAULTY PAUSE OPERATION FAULTY AUTOMATIC PROGRAM SEARCH FAULTY CUE/REVIEW MODE FAULTY SLOW MOTION OPERATION FAULTY HIGH-SPEED SCANNING MODE FAULTY SPEED COPY FUNCTION FAULTY REPEAT OPERATION FAULTY RECORD REVIEW MODE FAULTY AMS OPERATION OTHER MECHANICAL OPERATION PROBLEM
FOCUS PROBLEMZOOM PROBLEM IRIS PROBLEM MACRO PROBLEM OTHER LENS PROBLEM
LOW AUDIO LEVELEXCESSIVE AUDIO LEVEL BALANCE PROBLEM FADER PROBLEM AUDIO LEVEL REMAINING OTHER AUDIO LEVEL PROBLEM
POOR FREQUENCY RESPONSEDISTORTED AUDIO NO OR POOR TREBLE NO OR POOR BASS OTHER AUDIO QUALITY PROBLEM
HUMHISS CROSSTALK STATIC, POP OR CLICK NOISE BUZZ SCRATCHING NOISE IGNITION NOISE MULTIPATH NOISE OTHER AUDIO NOISE PROBLEM
JUMPING OR REPEATING AUDIOAUDIO PUMPING OR BREATHING AUDIO DROPOUTS CYCLIC AUDIO MUTING WOW AND FLUTTER HOWLING/ACOUSTIC FEEDBACK OTHER UNSTABLE AUDIO PROBLEM
AUDIO NOT BEING RECORDEDNO ERASURE PROTECTION FOR AUDIO PREVIOUS AUDIO RECORDING NOT BEINGERASEDUNWANTED ERASURE OF AUDIO MESSAGE NOT BEING RECORDED OTHER AUDIO RECORDING PROBLEM
FAULTY FADE OPERATIONFAULTY ECHO OPERATION FAULTY MIXING OPERATION FAULTY REPEAT MODE OPERATION FAULTY AUDIO PROCESSING FAULTY SYNC RECORDING OPERATION FAULTY DBB/DOL OPERATION FAULTY NOISE REDUCTION OPERATION OTHER SPECIAL AUDIO FUNCTIONPROBLEM
NO STEREO OPERATIONPOOR CHANNEL SEPARATION DIFFERENCE IN PHASE BETWEENCHANNELSPROBLEM WITH SURROUND SOUND MODE PROBLEM WITH PCM AUDIO MODE OTHER STEREO/MULTI MODE PROBLEM
WEAK COLOUREXCESSIVE COLOUR OTHER COLOUR LEVEL PROBLEM
SOME OR ALL COLOURS MISSINGPOOR WHITE BALANCE HUE PROBLEM PURITY ERROR LANDING ERROR CONVERGENCE ERROR REGISTRATION ERROR PITCH MOIR… OTHER COLOUR QUALITY PROBLEM
COLOUR NOISE ON A BLACK & WHITEPICTURECOLOUR STREAKING OTHER COLOUR NOISE PROBLEM
COLOUR FLASHINGHUE CONSTANTLY CHANGING FLICKERING COLOUR COLOUR NOT LOCKED OTHER UNSTABLE COLOUR PROBLEM
NO COLOUR RECORDINGOTHER COLOUR RECORDING PROBLEM
FAULTY AUTOMATIC WHITE BALANCEFAULTY COLOUR EFFECTS FUNCTION OTHER SPECIAL COLOUR FUNCTIONPROBLEM
PICTURE TOO DARKPICTURE TOO BRIGHT CONTRAST TOO LOW CONTRAST TOO HIGH SATURATED WHITE OR BLACK LEVEL SHADING ON PICTURE ONLY PARTIAL PICTURE OTHER PICTURE LEVEL PROBLEM
POOR PICTURE RESOLUTIONPOOR FOCUS RINGING ON PICTURE EXCESSIVE SMEAR/LAG POOR LINEARITY OR GEOMETRY PICTURE SIZE INCORRECT INCORRECT CENTRING OF PICTURE PICTURE SLANTED V-SIZE INCORRECT H-SIZE INCORRECT OTHER PICTURE QUALITY PROBLEM
SNOWY PICTUREDOT NOISE OR DROPOUT ON PICTURE NOISE BARS ON PICTURE BLANKING LINES ON PICTURE BEATING O PICTUREGHOSTING ON PICTURE VCR HEAD SWITCHING NOISE ON PICTURE OVERMODULATION NOISE OTHER PICTURE NOISE PROBLEM
SYNC PROBLEMPICTURE PUMPING PICTURE JITTER PICTURE SHAKING (HORIZONTAL ORVERTICAL)FLICKERING PICTURE FLASHING PICTURE CYCLIC PICTURE MUTING HEAD IMPACT ERROR CAUSING UNSTABLEPICTUREVCR SKEW ERROR FROZEN PICTURE JUMPING/REPEATING PICTURE OTHER 'UNSTABLE PICTURE' PROBLEM
NO PICTURE RECORDINGNO ERASURE PROTECTION FOR VIDEO PREVIOUS VIDEO RECORDING NOT BEINGERASEDUNWANTED ERASURE OF PICTURE NO CAMERA RECORDING ONLY ONE FIELD PER FRAME BEINGRECORDEDOTHER PICTURE RECORDING PROBLEM
EDITING PROBLEMFAULTY FADING/WIPER OPERATION FAULTY NEGATIVE/POSITIVE SWITCHINGFUNCTIONFAULTY SUPERIMPOSE/TELOP OPERATION FAULTY PICTURE IN PICTURE/DIGITALPICTURE OPERATIONFAULTY PICTURE TRANSMISSION FAULTY DIGITAL SHUTTER FUNCTION FAULTY GENLOCK FUNCTION FAULTY FLASH/STROBE FUNCTION FAULTY DIGITAL PICTURE FUNCTION FAULTY AUTO-EDIT FUNCTION OTHER SPECIAL PICTURE FUNCTIONPROBLEM
BURN MARK ON DISPLAY/PICKUPSCRATCH ON DISPLAY/PICKUP DUST/DIRT ON DISPLAY/PICKUP PHOSPHOR/PIXEL MISSING ONDISPLAY/PICKUPBRIGHT POINT(S) IN PHOSPHOR/PIXEL OTHER PICTURE DISPLAY/PICKUP PROBLEM
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 NO ACTION LEVEL QUALITY NOISE UNSTABLE RECORDING & PHYSICALPROBLEMS SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OTHER CONDITIONS2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONSTANTLY
INTERMITTENTLY
AFTER A WHILE
IN A HOT ENVIRONMENT
IN A COLD ENVIRONMENT
WHEN SWITCHING
UNDER VIBRATION
IN A DRY ENVIRONMENT
AFTER BEING DROPPED
AFTER LIGHTNING STRIKE
ONLY ON ONE CHANNEL
IN STANDBY/OFF MODE
AT EDIT POINT
WHEN INTERCONNECTED
LIQUID CONTAMINATION
IN A DAMP/WETENVIRONMENT
ONLY CERTAINSTATION(S)/SOFTWARE/ MODE
NO SYMPTOM ORPROBLEM FOUND
ONLY WITH CERTAININPUT(S)
ONLY ON CERTAINOUTPUT(S)
ONLY ON CERTAINSTANDARDS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
A
B
E
H
J
K
L
8
C
X
F
G
D
CONDITIONCODE
MAIN SYMPTOM CODE
EXTENDED SYMPTOM CODE(*1)
(*1)CAUTIONTHE 'X' EXTENDED SYMPTO CODES (*-**X) SHOUL ONLY BE USED TO INDICATE THAT A SUITABLE SYMPTOM DESCRIPTION IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THE CONCERNED SYMPTOM GROUP
CO
MM
UN
ICAT
ION
PIC
TUR
EC
OLO
UR
AUD
IOM
ECH
AN
ISM
DATA
PRO
CES
SIN
GPR
INTI
NG
GEN
ERA
L
IRIS REPAIR CODING SYSTEM SYMPTOM CODE TABLE
TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION PROBLEM
PROBLEM
PROBLEM
PROBLEM
FUNCTION OPERATION PROBLEM
PROBLEM
FUNCTIONS
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
SECTION CODES
ANT
APA
APD
APR
ARM
BCH
BZL
CBT
CHA
CLK
CPA
CPD
CRT
CTR
DDM
DFL
DPR
ERA
EXC
FDD
FLX
FMW
FPK
HCM
ANTENNA SECTION
AUDIO PROCESSING/ANALOG
AUDIO PROCESSING/DIGITAL
SIGNAL PROCESSING (ANALOG)
ARM MECHANISM
BATTERY CHARGE
BEZEL
CABINET
CHASSIS
CLOCK/TIMER SECTION
COLOUR PROCESSING/ANALOG
COLOUR PROCESSING/DIGITAL
PICTURE TUBE
CONTROL PANEL
DISC DRIVE MECHANISM
DEFLECTION CIRCUIT
SIGNAL PROCESSING (DIGITAL)
ERASE CIRCUIT
EXTERNAL CONNECTOR
FLOPPY DISC DRIVE
FLEXIBLE PCB
FIRMWARE
FOCUS PACK
HEAD CARRIAGE MECHANISM
HDD
HFS
HOL
IDS
IFC
IMG
INC
INP
KBD
LDG
LNM
MEM
MIC
OUT
PFM
PIN
PRG
PRI
PRT
PSU
PUD
PWA
REM
RFM
HARD DISC DRIVE
HIGH FREQUENCY SECTION (RF)
CASSETTE HOLDER
INFORMATION DISPLAY SECTION
IF-CIRCUIT
IMAGE DISPLAY UNIT
INTERNAL CONNECTOR
SIGNAL INPUT SECTION
KEYBOARD (SEPARATE)
LOADING MECHANISM
LENS MECHANISM
MEMORY CIRCUIT
MICROPHONE SECTION
SIGNAL OUTPUT SECTION
PAPER FEED MECHANISM
PINCH ROLLER/LEVER
PROGRAMMING SECTION
PRINT BLOCK
PROTECTION CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY
PICK-UP DEVICE
POWER AMP SECTION
REMOTE CONTROL SECTION
RIBBON FEED MECHANISM
RFU
RHD
SFT
SHD
SLD
SNS
SPK
SRS
STA
SVO
SYS
TDM
THR
TIM
TNR
TPT
TRS
TUN
TXT
VPA
VPD
VWF
WIR
XXX
BOOSTER/RF UNIT
ROTARY HEAD(S)
SOFTWARE (TAPE, DISC, ETC.)
STATIONARY HEAD(S)
SLED MECHANISM
SENSOR UNIT
SPEAKER
SUPPLY REEL SECTION
STATIC BLOCK
SERVO SECTION
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION
TAPE DRIVE MECHANISM
THREADING MECHANISM
TIMER SECTION
TENSION REGULATOR
TAPE PATH
TAKE-UP REEL SECTION
TUNING SECTION
TEXT PROCESSING
VIDEO PROCESSING/ANALOG
VIDEO PROCESSING/DIGITAL
VIEWFINDER
LEAD WIRE
CABINET/COSMETIC PARTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1
WORN OUT
DIRTY, CLOGGED
MISALIGNED
CUT, BROKEN
DEFORMED
SNAPPED
SCRATCHED
CRACKED, PEELED, CORRODED
LOOSE
SHAKY, UNSTABLE
LEAKING
DRY (NO LUBRICANT)
FOREIGN OBJECT
EXHAUSTED, LOW EMISSION
BURNT, ARCING, MISSING PIXELS
MISALIGNED
SHORT
OPEN
LEAKING
BAD CONTACT, CONNECTION
OPEN PATTERN
CRACKED PCB
COLD OR NO SOLDERING
BRIDGED SOLDERING
WRONG COMPONENT
MISSING COMPONENT
SOFTWARE BUG
DEFECT CODES
MECHANICAL ELECTRICALA
B
C
DE
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
REPLACEMENT
MECHANICAL ALIGNMENT
ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT
RESOLDERING
CLEANING
LUBRICATION
REPAIRED ELECTRICAL PARTS
REPAIRED MECHANICAL PARTS
S/B MODIFICATION
REMOVED COMPONENT (S)
ADDED COMPONENTS
FUNCTIONAL CHECK
SPECIFICATION MEASUREMENT
MAINTENANCE
REFURBISHING
PREVENTIVE PARTS REPLACEMENT
PREVENTIVE ACTION WITHOUT PARTS REPLACEMENT
EXPLANATION FOR CUSTOMER
ESTIMATION REFUSED
ESTIMATION WITH PARTS
ESTIMATION WITHOUT PARTS
RETURN WITHOUT REPAIR
SET EXCHANGE
REPAIR CODES
FLAG: INDICATES THE ONE MAJOR SYMPTOM/PART COMBINATION BY '1'
1.
13
46
14
21
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1X
1X
R1
11
21
3.
.
.YT
AD
2M
2.
.
.RC
AB
10
FLAG
EXAMPLE OF USE :
SYMPTOMCODE PART NO REF. NO SECTION/PCB D
EF
EC
TC
OD
E
RE
PA
IRC
OD
E
QTY
REV01
S-795-020-10
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
Use isolating mains transformer - Utiliser un transformateur isolateur du secteur -Einen Trenntrafo verwenden Utilizar un transformador aislador de red - Utilizzare un trasformatore per isolarvi dalla rete!
AC MAINS
BF423TP21
RGP02-20DP45
RGP10GDP12
RGP02-20DP43
BZX55B3V3DP14
BZX55C5V6DP22
BZX85C39DP21
BZX55C51DP20
1K0PP64
TL431ACZ
IP61
- T 2.5 ALFP01
DTC113ZKTP72
1U0CP52
4U7CP54
1N0CP43
100N0CP22
220P0CP20
150P
0
CP23
470N0CP16
470N0CP17
2N2CP49
100N0CP47
1N5CP59
100P0CP61
2N2CP44
100N0CP56
v845.0
RP05
-
TP50
2R2RP10
10M0RP50
470MI0RP49
470R0RP41
470R0RP54
1K0RP59
1K0RP19
432K0RP63
100R0RP95
PP
9R0RP15
470N0CP89
100N0CP38
BZX55C18DP59
BZX55C13DP94
BZX55C3V9DP44
BZX55C5V1DP72
GP30M
DP03
GP30M
DP04
GP30M
DP02
GP30M
DP01
2SA1020-YTP44
BC857BTP86
BC857BTP42
BC547BTP14
VI2 VI1
VO1
RESETDIS
VO2
PROG
GND
DELA
Y
-
IP95
12
3
4
5
6
78
9
1N4001GP
DP18
1N4001GP
DP16
1N4001GP
DP19
1N4001GP
DP17
BCR191TP82
BCR191TP75
BCR191TP57
0RP88
BTB06-600CTP15
LL4148DP40
LL4148DP67
LL4148DP62
LL4148DP61
LL4148DP60
LL4148DP63
LL4148DP66
RGP10GDP47
RGP10GDP48
RGP10GDP46
LL4148DP24
LL4148DP70
LL4148DP89
LL4148DP85
5
--
LP50
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
100R0RP08
470K0RP35
1K0RP38
270R0RP761K0
RP21220R0RP22
33K0RP69
100R0RP68
10R0RP71
470K0RP73
15R0RP13
1K0RP14
1M0
0W7
RP02
1M0RP61
8K25RP64
2K74RP97
1K0RP96
1K21RP99
475R0RP62
1K0RP66
1R0RP92
10K0RP77
100K0RP27
100K0
RP26
470K0RP30
27K0RP24
100K0RP25
4K7RP70
10K0RP87
1K0RP84
470R0RP11
270R0RP12
2K2RP74
3K3RP72
6K8RP55
150K0RP75
100R0
RP48
1K5RP46
100R0RP52
5K6RP53
10R0RP57
10K0RP56
6K8RP43
6K8RP42
10K0RP80
820R00W25
RP44
1K0RP94
*RL65
270K0RP31
10K0RP45
2K2RP60
100R0
RP40
470R0
0W25
RP20
100K0RP23
2K70W43
RP85
100R0RP39
1K0RP58
220R0RP09
1K0RP81
1K2RP82
100R0RP86
470K0RP01
10K0RP90
100R0RP89
33K0RP91 10K0
RP93
470K0RP06
470K0RP16
470K0RP17
470K0RP18
470K0RP78
2K2RP83
22K0RP79
1K0RP98
10K0RP65
LP44
13 5
MC7812/CTIP87
1
2
3
JL80
JL82
JL81
BC847BTP59
BC847BTP76
BC847BTP67
BC847BTP90
BC847BTP58
BC847BTP71
+
-
V-
IN-
IN+OUT
V+IP20
6
6
57
4
8
+
-
V-
IN-
IN+OUT
V+ TS3702CDIP20
2
3
3
1
4
8
MUR120DP93
MUR160DP82
RGP10GDP41
LL4148-
DP58
RGP02-20DP50
LL4148DP56
LL4148DP57
LL4148DP42
RGP02-20DP87
BAT42DP83
1N4148-
DP53
-DP80
MUR120DP84
LL4148-
DP52
LL4148-
DP54
5460702500
LP20
1
3
4
5
7
E
C
K
A
TLP621IP50
1
23
4
-
LP84
-
LP93
-
LP82
-
LP801 2
470U0CP13
220U0400V
CP10
1MI050V
CP84
470N0CP98
10U0CP97
470U016V
CP93
100U0200V
CP80
220U025V
CP69470U0CP66
22U0CP82
100U0CP26
4U750V
CP24
470U016V
CP96
10U0CP72
22U0CP58
10U0CP73
10U0CP87
100U0CP63
100P0CP12
4N7CP03
4N7CP04
68N0CP15
100N0CP01
1N5
CP05
10N0400V
CP11
1N0CP50
330P0CP85
10N0CP92
1N0CP95
1N0CP81
10N0CP86
100P0CP83
10N0CP41
150P0CP57
330P0CP94
1
BP01
1
1
BP151
5R0RP07
LP01
13
46
-
T RP0310R0
100R0RP28
150P0CP51
330P0
CP42
PO
+5VUP
+5VUP
GNDA
USYS
U_VIDEO
+UA
+UA
STBY_ON
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND PGND
PGND PGND
PGND PGND
PGND
PGND PGND PGND
PGND
PGND PGND
PGNDPGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGNDPGND
PGND
+5VDST
POWER_FAIL
U_STBY
-UA
-UA
+8V
+5VON
+5VON
U_TIMER
U_TIMER
RESET-
+33V
HEAT-GND
25V
BYW76
ON4977(BU2525AX)
ERZV14D511
1K6V
16V
0W25
0W25
0W25
25V
0W7
4kV
0W25
100V
2
(180V-260V)Mainsvoltage
2
To DEGAUSSING-COIL
350V
16V
TL431ACZ
TDA8139
275V~
275V~PGND
2W5
50V
0W25
0W25
PGND
0W25
(A,UP)
(A)
(UP)
(UP)
A2
A1G
Note :During measurements in the power supply unit- Use the primary power unit ground ( PGND ).Attention :Mesure dans le bloc alimentation- Utiliser la masse du bloc alimentation ( PGND ).Achtung :Bei Messungen im Primärnetzteil- Primärnetzteilmasse verwenden ( PGND ).Attenzione :misure nell'alimentatore primario - usare massa alimentazione primario ( PGND ).Cuidado :Medida en el bloque de alimentacion- Utilizar la masa del bloque de alimentacion ( PGND ).
Part of board connected to mains supply.Partie du châssis reliée au secteur.Primärseite des Netzteils.Parte dello châssis collegata alla rete.Parte del chassis conectar a la red.
(PP)17900
5K6RL85
470R0RL84
BL80BP8512
BC337-40TL80
BC337-40TL82
1N4148DL83
1N4148DL82
BZX55C15DL81
BZX55C27
DL80
100N0CL83
BC327-40TL83
BC327-40TL81
1K0RL83
1K0RL81
270R0RL87
270R0RL86
22R0RL80
150R0RL82
47U0
CL80
1MI0CL82
47K0PL80
BL82
12
BL81
12
UA
coilEFC-
EFC.17000.00 (TUBE 16/9)
HEARTH FIELD CONNECTION COIL
ICC17
BP85
BL80
EFC
21
MAIN
+5VUP
U_STBY
+8V
+5V
+33V
+8(0) +8V
+5V
+5V
+5V
Tube Format Usys Jumper RL65A51EFS83X191 4:3 126V JL80 4k7A59EHJ43X15 4:3 132V JL81 24kA66EHJ43X15 4:3 132V JL81 24kA59EGD048X30 4:3 126V JL80 4k7A68EGD038X30 4:3 126V JL80 4k7A68AGA25X01 4:3 126V JL80 4k7A80AEJ15X01 4:3 126V JL80 4k7W56EGV023X015 16:9 138V JL82 47kW66EGV023X015 16:9 138V JL82 47kW76EGV023X015 16:9 138V JL82 47k
42 (39,7)
5,4(3,4)
43(40)
2,7(1,7)
3(1,9)
4,1(2,5)
1,3(3)
5,7(0)
5,5(3,4)
5,5
2(1,2)
297
153(160)
150(159)
149(160)
7,2
7,2 (0)
(0)6,9 (0)
6,7(0)
-1,02(0,2)
297(316)
15VPP T=12µs
5VPP-H
1000VPP T=12µs
-1,1(0,1)
0,2(0)
2,7(2,6)
3,2(0)0,5(0,7)
0,1(0,7)
17(0)
(2,6)3,2 (0,2)
2,5 (0)
5 (0,2)
4,9 (0,2)
12 (0)
3
5 (0)
5 (0)
0 (0)
+33v
+12v
5(0)
-2,2 (0)
33 (0)
12,2 (0)
8(0)
+200V
2,8 (0)
12(0)
12(0)
0(0)
0,7(0)
0(07)
0(0,7)9,3(0)
0(0)
6,8(7,1)
+12V
(5) : standby
POWER SUPPLY - ALIMENTATION - NETZTEIL - ALIMENTAZIONE - ALIMENTACIÓN
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
DEV
T = 20ms T = 64µs
+8V
349
15,7
7,9
7,8
7,8
2,3
2,3
11,5
6,3
0,46,5
6,3
6,16,3
00
0
1,2
0,6
16,1
0,7
0,5
0,1
0
+8V
+5VON
15,7
15,7
+5VDST
49
49
+5VUP
+5VON55,6
5,7
0,80,8
0,3 0,1
12Vpp-V
50Vpp-V
15Vpp-H13Vpp-H
1Vpp-V
12Vpp-V
1100Vpp-H
1,2Vpp-H
0 2V
5Vpp-H5Vpp-V0
T = 20ms
0,9Vpp-F 2V0
10515550DP.17169.00
DP.17169.00
RL571K0
RL55220K0
RL5318K0
RL5410K0
18K0
RL511K0
RL56
TL55BF422
DL51RGP10M
TL52BF423
CL55330P0
CL53100N0
CL51*
CL5222N0
TL51SH2G41
P_SWITCH
RL52
1K0
GNDL GNDL GNDL
1
BF01B
1
1
BL02
1 1234567
7
(DP).17043.00
LL33
LL33
LL311 2
PZL14
500MI0
100P0CL33
CL24*
DEV
LL13
10095060
LL22
4 1
*
TL31BC847B
TL32BC337-40
RL13470MI0
RL076K19
RL0145K3
RL04*
RL05*
RL42100R0
RL4368K1
RF023K01
RL442R2
RF01100R0
RF03100R0
RL261K0
RF04*
RF07220R0
RF0833R0
RF113K9
RL12100K0
RF1339K0
RF1268K0
RL7113K0
RL7224K0
RL3722R00W25
RL362R2
RL321K0
RL332K2
RL354R70W5
RL313K3
RL341K8
RL5910K0
RL1810K0
RL096K8
RL584K7
RL401K0
RF05*
RF06*
RL03*
RL06*
RL41220R0
RL49*
RL02*
RL16
RF09
G2 BB03
FOCUS
CRT
EHT
LL05
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1011
10500980
CL12330P0
CL15 330P0
CL251U0
TL59BC857B
PZL13
630MI0
LL26*
CL422U7
CF1010N0
CF011N0
CL21*
CL22*
CL41
100P0
CF021N0
CF03220N0
CF04CF0422N0
CF08220N0
CF111N0CF12
100P0
CL3122P0
CL364N7
CL59470N0
CL48*
CL0810N0
TL33MPS750
DL71*
DL09BZX55C5V1
DL25RGP10G
DL24RGP10G
DL11RGP10M
DL121N4148
DL19LL4148
DL48
BAV103
RL246K8
RL256K8
RL1047R0
RL48*
RL114R7
RL4733K0
RL4612K0
RL45*
RL15
1K0
RL705K6
TF01BC847B
TL02BF422
TL42BC546B
DL21BY228
DL22BYW76
DL721N4148
DL73LL4148
DL321N4148
DL331N4148
DL31BAV21
DL13RGP30D
DL14RGP15G
47K0
RB10
O(B)
O(A) +V
+V
P
P
P
+V
+V
+V
S
S
T
T+I
+I
-I
-I
SOURCECURRENT
-+
-+
-+
+
+
-+
+V
IF01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TDA8351
TL34BUH516TH16
TL41BD241C
TL142SC2236Y
CL11100U0
CL38220U0
16V
CL3710U0
CL32470U0
16V
CL14470U0
CL131MI0
CL16470U0
CL09
4U710U0
DF01BZW04-48
JL60
10518110
LL32
1
3
4
6
ZMM5.1DL42
*RL19
BF01A 1
1N0CL39
2K2RL39
DL77LL4148
TL71BC847C
RL764K7
RL75680R0
RL7410K0
RL7312K0
CL711N0
CL72100U0
RN1401TL72
27K0RL77
DL751N4148
DL741N4148
VGUARD
EW
VSUPPLY
VSUPPLY
VSUPPLY
+V LFB
HEAT
_2
HDRIVE
USYS
+5VO
N
GNDT GNDT
VFLB
EHT2
EHT2
VRETRACE
VRETRACE
VRETRACE
HEAT
_1
BCL
BCL
U_VI
DEO
PZL11
500MI0
FORM
AT/B
C
U_TIMER
U_DRIVER
U_TI
MER-V
EHT
SAFETY
GNDF
GNDF
GNDF
GNDF
GNDF GNDF
GNDF
GNDF GNDF
GNDF
GNDF GNDF
+8V
PO
GNDL
GNDL
GNDL
GNDL
GNDL GNDL GNDL
GNDL
GNDL
GNDL
GNDL
GNDL
GNDL GNDL
GNDL
GNDLGNDL
GNDL
GNDL
GNDLGNDL
GNDLGNDL
GNDLGNDL
GNDLGNDL
GNDL
GNDLGNDL
GNDL
GNDL
GNDL GNDL
#
to C
RT-B
ord
CRT
# see in CRT 17xxx xx partlist
(uP)
(uP)
**
(uP,
OS)
(P)(P)
(OS)
(OS)
(P)
(P)
6
(P)
(OS)
(P)
(OS)
(OS,A)
(OS)
(OS)(O
S,A)
(uP)
(OS)
(P)
(OS)
(OS)
* see in CT 17xxx xx partlist
BF01
2
2
BL01
V
*
DEV H-YOKE
-+
(DP17169.00)
*
*DP
1769
.00
DP1769.00
DP1769.00
TV ASY A59EHJ43X15 00TV ASY A66EHJ43X15 00Tube 4/3 25", 28" , MP /Vectorgun
10518330 TV PSD CT 17061 32CL21 14N0F +3.5% -3.5% 1K5VCL22 30N0F +5% -5% 400.0VCL24 470N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL24 440N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL41 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0VCL48 CPM 10N0F +10% 63.0VDL48 D-SLP BAV103 200.0VDL71 D-ZENER BZX55C30 30V 500MI0WJL60 WIREBARE 22JL81 0 OHM +0% 100MI0WJP80 0 OHM +0% 100MI0WLB02 LF 18U0H +7% -7%LL05 TF-DST M30FBC3 10546610 3087 A0LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5% R 2873 A0 00LL26 LL 26U5H +10%LL26 LL 30U5H 2519 A0RF04 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0WRF05 1R0 OHM +1% 700MI0WRF05 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0WRF06 12R1 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL02 10K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL02 6K04 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL02 499R0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL03 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL03 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 20K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 20K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL11 4R7 OHM +10% 250MI0WRL11 4R7 OHM +5% 250MI0WRL19 22K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL19 33K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL43 68K1 OHM +1% 250MI0WRL43 68K1 OHM +1% 250MI0WRL43 68K1 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL45 180K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL45 270K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL46 12K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL47 33K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL48 76K8 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL48 60K4 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL64 8K25 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL65 RCF 24K0 OHM +5% 250MI0WRV20 RMF 33K2 OHM +1% 250MI0WRV20 33K2 OHM +1% 100MI0WZL13 PROTEC MOD MP63 630MI0 A 65.0V
TV ASY W56EGV023X015 56 01TV ASY W66EGV023X015 66 00TV ASY W76EGV023X015 (A) 00Tube 16/9 24", 28",32", SF / vectorgun
10515530 TV PSD CT 17083 38CL21 15N5F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6V CL22 27N0F +5% -5% 400.0VCL24 440N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL41 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0V CL48 100N0F +5% 63.0VCL51 290N0F +5% -5% 250.0V DL48 D-SLP BAV103 200.0VDL71 D-ZENER BZX55C24 24V 500MI0WJL60 WIREBARE 22JL82 0 OHM +0% 100MI0W LB02 LF 32U0H +4% -4%LL05 TF-DST TDS29 15314460 10LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5% LL26 LL 30U5H 2519 A0RF05 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0WRL02 4K99 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL03 6K49 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL04 6K49 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL05 6K49 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 2K37 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL19 13K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL45 390K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL48 220K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL49 180K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL65 47K0 OHM +5% 250MI0WRV20 100K0 OHM +1% 250MI0W
TV ASY A51EFS83X191 03Tube 4/3 21" OT
10555770 TV PSD CT 17035 26CL21 8N3F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6VCL22 33N0F +5% -5% 1K0VCL24 440N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL41 1N0F +10% -10% 50.0VDL71 D-ZENER BZX55C24 24V 500MI0WJL60 WIREBARE 22JL80 0 OHM +0% 100MI0WLB02 LF 18U0H +7% -7%LL05 TF-DST M30FBC3 10555640 3087 A0LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5% R 2873 A0 00LL26 LL 85U0H 2519 A0RF05 1R5 OHM +1% 700MI0WRF06 10R0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL02 6K04 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL03 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 3K32 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL45 110K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL49 60K4 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL65 4K7 OHM +5% 250MI0WRV20 23K7 OHM +1% 250MI0W
TV ASY A80AEJ15X01 (A) 00Tube 4/3 33" , MP
10575830 TV PSD CT 17062 26CL21 16N2F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6VCL22 30N0F +5% -5% 400.0VCL24 560N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL41 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0VCL48 10N0F +10% 63.0VDL48 D-SLP BAV103 200.0VDL71 D-ZENER BZX55C30 30V 500MI0WJL60 WIREBARE 22JL80 0 OHM +0% 100MI0WLB02 LF 32U0H +4% -4%LL05 TF-DST TDS29 TBD 11LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5% R 2873 A0 00LL26 LL 26U5H +10%RF05 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0WRF06 10R0 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL02 6K04 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL03 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 6K81 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL19 13K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL45 150K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL48 76K8 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL49 560K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL65 RCF 4K7 OHM +5% 250MI0WRV20 RMF 23K7 OHM +1% 250MI0W
TV ASY A59EGD048X30 19TV ASY A68EGD038X30 (A) 68 00Tube 4/3 25" SF, 29" SF
10515520 TV PSD CT 17071 26CL21 16N2F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6VCL22 30N0F +5% -5% 400.0VCL24 510N0F +5% -5% 250.0VCL41 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0VCL48 10N0F +10% 63.0VDL48 D-SLP BAV103 200.0VDL71 D-ZENER BZX55C30 30V 500MI0WJL60 WIREBARE 22JL80 0 OHM +0% 100MI0WLB02 LF 32U0H +4% -4%LL05 TF-DST TDS29 TBD 13LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5%LL26 LL 26U5H +10%RF05 RMF 1R0 OHM +1% 700MI0WRL02 6K8 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL03 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL04 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL05 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL06 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0WRL19 15K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL45 180K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL48 100K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL49 300K0 OHM +5% 100MI0WRL65 4K7 OHM +5% 250MI0WRV20 33K2 OHM +1% 250MI0W
Indicates critical safety components, and identical components should be used for replacement. Only then can the operational safety be garanteed.
Le remplacement des éléments de sécurité (repérés avec le symbole ) par des composants non homologués selon la Norme CEI 65 entraine la non-conformité de l'appareil.Dans ce cas, la responsabilité du fabricant n'est plus engagée.
Wenn Sicherheitsteile (mit dem Symbol gekennzeichnet) durch nicht normgerechte Teile ersetzt werden, erlischt die Haftung des Herstellers.
La sostituzione degli elementi di sicurezza (contrassegnati con il segno ) con componenti non omologati secondo la norma CEI 65 comporta la non conformitá dell'apparecchio.In tal caso é “esclusa la responsabilità” del costruttore.
La subtitución de elementos de seguridad (marcados con el simbolo ) por componentes no homologados segun la norma CEI 65, provoca la no conformidad del aparato.En ese caso, el fabricante cesa de ser responsable.
BB02
TUBE 16/9
MAIN
SCANNING - BALAYAGE - ABLENKUNG - BARRIDO - SCANSIONE
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
47U0CR10
2N2CR96
470N0CR99
BCR141TR40
BCR141TR13
DTC113ZKTR20
BCR141TR23
10U0
LR20
10K0RR69
100R0RR66
10K0RR49
100R0RR12100R0RR17
1K5RR011K5RR02
39K0RR0339K0RR04
39K0RR08
4K7RR18
10K0RR05
10K0RR06
10K0RR09
10K0RR621K0RR63
150R0RR70560R0RR72560R0RR74560R0RR76
1K0RR781K0RR806K8RR90
10K0RR58
10K0RR56
5K6
RR91
5K6RR931K0RR94
5K6RR9515K0RR96
1K0RR57100R0RR55
3K3RR33
3K3RR32
220R0RR31
220R
0RR
30
*RR44
1K0
RR43
100R
0RR
421K
0RR
4110
0R0
RR40
10K0RR5010K0RR51
10K0RR46
0JR51
6K8RR53
6K8RR52
100R0RR16
22K0RR14
4K7RR15
22K0RR21
1K0RR22
10K0RR20
100R
0RR
45
4K7RR64
1K5RR71
1K5RR73
1K5RR75
1K5RR77
6K8RR8210K0
RR81
33K0RR60
1K0RR10
100R0RR68
*
RR48
LR02
12
BC857BTR15
470R0RR86
2K2RR87
10N0CR21
100N0CR01
NICR03
82P0CR04
100N0CR12
47P0CR09
47P0CR08
47P0CR07
47P0CR06
47P0CR05
100N0CR20
220P0CR90220N0CR91
4N7CR93
1N0CR94
4N7CR95
82P0CR98
100P0CR32
100P0CR33
100N0CR30
10N0CR22
22P0CR97
22P0CR92
100N0CR15
100N0CR11
1N0CR41
1N0CR23
1N0CR80
1N0CR24
(RP).17001.00
(RP).17000.00
OSCIN
P4.2/PWM2
PWM
3P4
.3/INT2
P5.0/SCK/
INT7
P2.0
/
P3.4/RWN
P3.6/ASN
MMU4MMU2MMU1ADDR14ADDR13
R/WN
OSCOUT
VDDMGNDM
P5.1/SDI/SDO/INT1
ADDR
2
ADDR10
ADDR
1AD
DR0
DAT7
DAT6
DAT0
DAT5
DAT1
DAT4
DAT2
DAT3
R
B
P4.0/PWM0P4.1/PWM1
P4.4
/PW
M4
P4.5
/PW
M5
P4.6
/PW
M6
P4.7
/PW
M7/
INT3
P2.5
/INT4
/AIN
3/VS
O2
P2.4
/NM
IP2
.3/IN
T6/V
SO1
P2.2
/INT0
/AIN
2P2
.1/IN
T5/A
IN1
P3.5
MMU5
MMU3MMU0 AD
DR15
ADDR
12AD
DR7
ADDR
6
ADDR8
ADDR
5
ADDR9
ADDR
4
ADDR11
ADDR
3
DSNGNDA
CVBS1CVBS2TEST0
CVBSOTXCF
JTRSTOMCFMRESETPXFMVDDAWSCFWSCR
HSYNCVSYNC
G
FB
GND
VDD
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P3.7/CSO/RESETI
#IR01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65666768697071727374757677787980
10U0LR10
BC847BTR60
BAT42DR10
LL4148DR21
LL4148DR22
1N4148DR20
1N4148DR23
LL4148DR24
LL42DR05
BR08
1
4M0
QR01
NCVSS
WC
SDA
SCL
MOD
E/PR
E
E
VCC
ST24C08MIR03
12345 6 7 8
BR01BK01
1
1
23456789
9
A18
Q7
A17
OE
CE
Q6Q5Q4Q3
Q2Q1Q0
VCC
A14A13A8A9
A11
A10A1A0
GND
A2A3A4A5A6A7A12A15A16VPP
IR02
123456789
10111213141516 17
181920212223242526272829303132
MX27C4000MC-90
DAT7
DAT7
DAT6
DAT6
DAT3
DAT3
ADDR
12
ADDR12
ADDR9ADDR9
MMU0 MMU0
KEYB_B
DAT4
DAT4
KEYB_A
ADDR10
ADDR10
TRAP_INFO
DAT1
DAT1
DAT2
DAT2
ADDR
15
ADDR15
+5VUP
AVS1
RESET-
RESET-
KEY_IN_2KEY_IN_1
SCL
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
VFLBLFB
AV3_PORT
B_OSDG_OSD
CVBSTXT
AVS2
STBY
_ON
STBY_ON
MUT
E-
AV_L
INK
ADDR14
ADDR14
U_STBY
SDA
DAT0
DAT0
ADDR
0
ADDR0
ADDR
1
ADDR1
ADDR
2
ADDR2
ADDR
3
ADDR3
ADDR
7
ADDR7
ADDR
5
ADDR5
ADDR
6
ADDR6
POW
ER_F
AIL
DAT5
DAT5
R_OSD
+8V
PO
FB_OSD
IR
RESE
T_M
SP-
ADDR13
ADDR13GNDP
GNDP
ADDR11ADDR11
ADDR8
ADDR8
ADDR
4
ADDR4
FORMAT
MMU1
MMU1
MMU2
MMU2
BCC
ST92R195 CUT 2.2 JAM (10588150)ST92R195 CUT 2.2 JAL (10592030)
# IR01
RP 17001 00RP 17000 00
* = value see partlist DP 17... 00
*
16/9RR484/3RR44
DSN
DSN
Form
at-d
etec
t
Stby-PortLed-Port
Po-Port
(OS)
(OS,
A)(O
S,A)(A)
(A)
(P)
(P)
(P)
(P)
(P)
(P)
(P)(P
)
(P)
VDDA
(DP)(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
(OS)
(OS)(OS)(OS)(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)(OS)
4M0
FCB
MAIN
U_STBY
VDDA
+5VUP
+5VUP
5V_VCC
5V_VCC
5V_VCC
5V_VCC
5V_VCC
5V_VCC
5V_VCC
5V_VCC5V_VCC
5V_VCC
U_STBY
+8V
+8V
+5V_STBY
+5V_STBY
+5V_STBY
6 = TV
0 = TV
4,8 = TV0 = Stdby
+5V_STBY
U_STBY
0,3 =TV
0,7 = TV
0 = TV4,8 = TV
4,8 = TV0 = Mute
0 = Mute
0
0,2 = Stdby
0 = Stdby
0 = Mute
0,15 = Stdby
0 = Stdby
7,1= Stdby
7,1= Stdby6,7 = TV5,3 = Stdby
6,8 = TV7,1= Stdby
VDDA
VDDA
5
6,8
CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR - MICROPROCESSEUR DE COMMANDE - MIKROPROZESSOR - MICROPROCESSORE DEI COMANDI - MICROPROCESADOR DE LOS MANDOS
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
T = 20ms T = 64µs
0
33,55
4 = Secam0 = Pal
0 = Secam5 = Pal
3,7 = Secam0 = Pal
0 = Secam5,1 = Pal
8
5
2,5
2,5
1,8
1,8
4,9
2,5
2,5
2,3
3
2,3 8
3
00
4,6
2,3 2,3 1,1
3
0,5
2,8
3
8
2,3
4,6 2,1
2,50
0
3,6
2,2
3,8
3,8
2,8
3,4
4,9
4,8
6,8
7,9 7,91,2 3,5 0 4 3 3,3 3,5 2,55,5
2,53
3,8
3,8
3,8
3
3
3
0
0
2,3
4
3,9
3,9
6Vpp-H6Vpp-V
4Vpp-H
3,2Vpp-H
3,5Vpp-H
2Vpp-H
3,8Vpp-H
1V
1V
1,2V0
0
0
3,8Vpp-H
3,5Vpp-H
1,8V
1,5V1,5V
2V
1,5Vpp-V0 1,5V
Standard picture carrier[MHz]
sound carrier[MHz]
SWO1 SWO2 MOD L’FA VSW IFS STM
B/G 38.90 0 1 0 0 0 0 0I 38.90 32.90/32.35 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D/K 38.90 32.40/32.65 0 1 0 0 0 0 0K’ 38.90 32.40/33.05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0L 38.90 32.40/33.05 0 0 1 0 0 0 0L' 33.90 40.40 1 0 1 1 0 0 0AV X X X X X X 0 X X
+5VON
+8V
DTC144EKTI45
DTC144EKTI10
DTC144EKTI30
100N0CI55
1N0CV09
4N7CI61
1N0CC11
22N0CV15
22N0CV17
22N0CV16
22N0CV12
22N0CV11
22N0CV10
1N0CV14
220N
0
CC10
2N7
CV20
100N0CV02
100N0CC05
3N3CC04
18P0
CC0718P0
CC06
4N7CV22
100N0CC021N0
CV25
1N0CV23
1N0CV24
82P0CV05
82P0CV06
82P0CV07
12P0CI05
12P0CI03
6P8CI04
6P8CI02
15P0CV27
2U2LX59
470N0LI10
6U8LV06
6U8LV05
6U8LV07
2U2LX62
560R0RI63
680R0RI50
56R0RI64
75R0RX08
2K2RI33
100R0RV03
1K5RI31
75R0RX39
150R
0
RX19
220R0RX28
220R0RV10
2K7RH03
150R0RX57
100R0RI07
1K5RI42
220R0RV09
2K2RX47
75R0RX56
100R0RX59
75R0RX05
390R0RI51
82R0RI04
4K7RI03
75R0RX06
75R0RX07
150R
0
RX25
150R
0
RX24
150R
0
RX23
150R
0
RX22
75R0RX09
75R0RX58
220R0RX27
0RX43
75R0RX18
100R0RH02
100R0RH10
15K0RH04
3K9RH05
2K2RI41
1R0RV01
2K2RX13
180R0RI65
160R0RI66
39K2RV25
2K2RI32
10K0RX03
10K0RX02
0RX14
10R0RX17
4K7RV19
*RV20
220R0RI59
220R0RI58
1K0RI61
10R0RX16
31M9-
FI02123
4
56
7
8
40M4-
FI01123
456
7
8
BX501234
100N0CH01
1K0RI60
100R0RV31
100R0RV30
100R0RV14
100R0RV07
100R0RV06
100R0RV05
6K8RV15
100K0RC05
15K0RV17
22K0RV16
1R0RC02
8K2RV12
2K7
RV08
100R0RV18
1K0RV13
BC547BTX15
BC547BTX45
BC847BTI60
BC847BTV10
BZX55B33DH01
-
FI10
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
BA782SDI40
1N4148DH04
BAV103DX62
BAV103DX59
-FI30
123
456
7
8
NC IF+30VNCNC+5V
DACLASNCAGC
-
NH01
12
3 4 5 6 9 1011
LL4148DV09
BA782SDI30
1N4148DV19
330P0CX02
1N0CI58
22N0CI43
15P0CI09
1N0CI59
22N0CI72
100N0CX47
10N0CI60
100N0CV26
10N0CI56
100N0CX17
100N0CX18
22N0CX60
330P
0
CX03
22N0CX61
1N0CI10
1N0CI12
22N0CI45
1N0CX19
22N0CI47
10N0CI53
27P0CX58
GNDO2
O1
I2
I1-
FI20
1
2
3
4
5
4M433619
QC01
3M579545QC02
1U0
CC01
10U0CX62
100U0CV03
100U0CC031U0
CV21
10U0CX59
10U0CX15
470U0CH03
10U0CI63
2U2CI54
100U0CH08
2U2CI57
4U7CV08
4U7CV01
4U7CV04
2U2CI50
BX02123456789
101112131415161718192021
BX01123456789
101112131415161718192021
Safety PartWhen repairing, use original part only
Piece de securiteN'utilisez que les pieces d'origine
Bei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwendenSicherheitsbauteil
(OS).17055.00
10U0LH10
3U3LI50
IN1bGN
DIN
2bCT
LbOU
TbOU
TaCT
LaIN
2a
IN1a
VCC
BA7604NIX01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-
FI50
1
2
3
BX04123456
BV01123456
AMOU
T
VP1
SW01
IFVC02
IFVC01
QSS0
SIFAGC
SIFIN2
SIFIN1
CVBS
10
SW02
GND2
RO
BCLIN
RI
GI
BI
RGBIN
LUMIN
LUMOUT
RI2
GI2
BI2
RGBIN2
BYO
RYO
BYI
RYI
REFO
XTAL1
XTAL2
GOBoBLKI
N
CVBS
ext
SECP
LL
CVBS
20
GND1
CVBS
INT
CVBS
/Y
CHRO
MA
DET
VP2
DECD
IG
HOUT
FBIS
O
PH2L
F
PH1L
F
EWD
VRDA
VDRB
DECBG
SDA
SCL
IFVO
PLLF
NC
AGCOUT
DECAGC
IREF
VCS
EHTO
IFIN2
IFIN1
IV01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52535455565758596061626364
TDA8855H
G_SC
G_SC
+5VO
N
+5VON
+5VON
R_SC
R_SC
CVBS1_OUT
SAFETY
AV2/
AV3_
Y/CV
BS
AV2/
AV3_
Y/CV
BS
VGUARD
GNDV
GNDV GNDV GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDVGNDV
GNDVGNDVGNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
CHRO
MA_
AV2/
AV3
CHRO
MA_
AV2/
AV3
CVBS2_OUT
G_OSD
B_OSD
CVBS2_IN
TRAP
_INF
O
AVS2
AV2_
IN_L
AV1_
CVBS
_IN
AV1_
CVBS
_IN
AV3_
PORT
AV2_
CVBS
_OUT
AV2_
CVBS
_OUT
CHROMA_IN
CVBS
TXT
AV1_
IN_R
AVS1
AV1_
IN_L
CVBS1_IN
AV2_
OUT_
R
AV1_
OUT_
L
+33V
AV1_
OUT_
R
AV2_
OUT_
L
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1GND1
GND1
GND1GND1GND1 GND1GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
SIF
GNDAU
GNDAU
GNDAU
FB_SC
FB_S
C
SCL
SCL
SCL
B_SC
B_SC
FB_OSD
AV2_
IN_R
SDA
SDA
SDA
IFAV
1_CV
BS_O
UT
AV1_
CVBS
_OUT
AV3_
R
+8V
+8V
+8V
+8V
AV3_
L
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2GND2
GND2
GND2GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDTGNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT GNDT
GNDT
R_OSD
BCL
GNDA
EHT
+5VUP
+5VU
P(D
P)
(uP)
77M8
K9650M
K6257K
91P0
* = see CT 17xxx partslist
(uP)
TDA8855H
4M433619
5M74
CTT5010
(P) (D
P)
(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
(P)
(P)
(P)
(P)
AV1
AV2
(A)
(A)(A
)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
CRRO
MA
FRON
T-CO
NNEC
TOR
AV3
Y/CV
BS/A
V3
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
GNDSCLSDA
AM/A
F(A)
-V+V EW LFB
HDRI
VE
+8V
+8V
TO C
RT B
OARD
(uP)
(uP)
68p
SW02
SW01
1
6
1
6
CRT
FCB
BJ04
MAIN
RF/FI/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSING -HF/FI INTERFACE PERITELEVISION/TRAITEMENT LUMINANCE CHROMINANCE - HF/ZF/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEOSIGNALVERARBEITUNG - RF/FI /PRESA PERITEL/ELABORAZIONE VIDEO - RF/FI /EUROCONECTOR / TRATAMENTO VIDEO
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
T = 20ms T = 64µs
0
33,55
4 = Secam0 = Pal
0 = Secam5 = Pal
8
5
2,5
2,5
1,8
1,8
4,9
2,5
2,5
2,3
3
2,3 8
3
4,6
2,3 2,3 1,1
3
0,5
2,8
3
8
2,3
4,6
2,1
2,50
0
3,6
2,2
3,8
3,8
2,8
3,4
4,9
4,8
6,8
7,9 7,91,2 3,5 4 3 3,3 3,5 2,55,5
2,53
3,8
3,8
3,8
3
3
3
0
0
2,3
4
3,9
3,9
6Vpp-H6Vpp-V
4Vpp-H
3,2Vpp-H
3,5Vpp-H
2Vpp-H
3,8Vpp-H
1V
1V
1,2V0
0
0
3,8Vpp-H
3,5Vpp-H
1,8V
1,5V1,5V
2V
+5VON+8V
+8V
+5VON
+8V
+5VON
+5VUP 1,5Vpp-V0 1,5V
DTC144EKTI10
100N0CI55
1N0CV09
4N7CI61
1N0CC11
22N0CV15
22N0CV17
22N0CV16
22N0CV12
22N0CV11
22N0CV10
1N0CV14
220N
0
CC10
2N7
CV20
100N0CV02
100N0CC05
3N3CC04
18P0
CC0718P0
CC06
4N7CV22
100N0CC021N0
CV25
1N0CV23
1N0CV24
82P0CV05
82P0CV06
82P0CV07
12P0CI05
12P0CI03
6P8CI04
6P8CI02
15P0CV27
2U2LX59
470N0LI10
6U8LV06
6U8LV05
6U8LV07
2U2LX62
560R0RI63
680R0RI50
56R0RI64
75R0RX08
2K2RI33
100R0RV03
75R0RX39
150R
0
RX19
220R0RX28
220R0RV10
2K7RH03
150R0RX57
100R0RI07
220R0RV09
2K2RX47
75R0RX56
100R0RX59
75R0RX05
390R0RI51
82R0RI04
4K7RI03
75R0RX06
75R0RX07
150R
0
RX25
150R
0
RX24
150R
0
RX23
150R
0
RX22
75R0RX09
75R0RX58
220R0RX27
0RX43
75R0RX18
100R0RH02
100R0RH10
15K0RH04
3K9RH05
2K2RI41
1R0RV01
2K2RX13
180R0RI65
160R0RI66
39K2RV25
2K2RI32
10K0RX03
10K0RX02
0RX14
10R0RX17
4K7RV19
*RV20
1K0RI61
10R0RX16
31M9-
FI02123
4
56
7
8
40M4-
FI01123
456
7
8
BX501234
100N0CH01
1K0RI60
100R0RV31
100R0RV30
100R0RV14
100R0RV07
100R0RV06
100R0RV05
6K8RV15
100K0RC05
15K0RV17
22K0RV16
1R0RC02
8K2RV12
2K7
RV08
100R0RV18
1K0RV13
BC547BTX15
BC547BTX45
BC847BTI60
BC847BTV10
BZX55B33DH01
1N4148DH04
BAV103DX62
BAV103DX59
-FI30
123
456
7
8
NC IF+30VNCNC+5V
DACLASNCAGC
-
NH01
12
3 4 5 6 9 1011
LL4148DV09
1N4148DV19
330P0CX02
22N0CI43
15P0CI09
22N0CI72
100N0CX47
10N0CI60
100N0CV26
10N0CI56
100N0CX17
100N0CX18
22N0CX60
330P
0
CX03
22N0CX61
1N0CI10
1N0CI12
1N0CX19
22N0CI47
10N0CI53
27P0CX58
GNDO2
O1
I2
I1-
FI20
1
2
3
4
5
4M433619
QC01
3M579545QC02
1U0
CC01
10U0CX62
100U0CV03
100U0CC031U0
CV21
10U0CX59
10U0CX15
470U0CH03
10U0CI63
2U2CI54
100U0CH08
2U2CI57
4U7CV08
4U7CV01
4U7CV04
2U2CI50
BX02123456789
101112131415161718192021
BX01123456789
101112131415161718192021
Safety PartWhen repairing, use original part only
Piece de securiteN'utilisez que les pieces d'origine
Bei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwendenSicherheitsbauteil
10515740OS.17056.00
20.01.98
10U0LH10
3U3LI50
IN1b
GND
IN2b
CTLb
OUTb
OUTa
CTLa
IN2a
IN1a
VCC
BA7604NIX01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-
FI50
1
2
3
BX041
1
23456
6
BV011 123456 6
AMOU
T
VP1
SW01
IFVC02
IFVC01
QSS0
SIFAGC
SIFIN2
SIFIN1
CVBS
10
SW02
GND2
RO
BCLIN
RI
GI
BI
RGBIN
LUMIN
LUMOUT
RI2
GI2
BI2
RGBIN2
BYO
RYO
BYI
RYI
REFO
XTAL1
XTAL2
GOBoBLKI
N
CVBS
ext
SECP
LL
CVBS
20
GND1
CVBS
INT
CVBS
/Y
CHRO
MA
DET
VP2
DECD
IG
HOUT
FBIS
O
PH2L
F
PH1L
F
EWD
VRDA
VDRB
DECBG
SDA
SCL
IFVO
PLLF
NC
AGCOUT
DECAGC
IREF
VCS
EHTO
IFIN2
IFIN1
IV01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52535455565758596061626364
TDA8855H
G_SC
G_SC
+5VO
N
R_SC
R_SC
CVBS1_OUT
SAFETY
AV2/
AV3_
Y/CV
BS
AV2/
AV3_
Y/CV
BS
VGUARD
GNDV
GNDV GNDV GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDVGNDV
GNDVGNDVGNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
GNDV
CHRO
MA_
AV2/
AV3
CHRO
MA_
AV2/
AV3
CVBS2_OUT
G_OSD
B_OSD
CVBS2_IN
TRAP
_INF
O
AVS2
AV2_
IN_L
AV1_
CVBS
_IN
AV1_
CVBS
_IN
AV3_
PORT
AV2_
CVBS
_OUT
AV2_
CVBS
_OUT
CHROMA_IN
CVBS
TXT
AV1_
IN_R
AVS1
AV1_
IN_L
CVBS1_IN
AV2_
OUT_
R
AV1_
OUT_
L
+33V
AV1_
OUT_
R
AV2_
OUT_
L
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1GND1
GND1
GND1GND1GND1 GND1GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
SIF
GNDAU
GNDAU
GNDAU
FB_SC
FB_S
C
SCL
SCL
SCL
B_SC
B_SC
FB_OSD
AV2_
IN_R
SDA
SDA
SDA
IF
AV1_
CVBS
_OUT
AV1_
CVBS
_OUT
AV3_
R
+8V
+8V
+8V
AV3_
L
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2GND2
GND2GND2
GND2
GND2GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
JI50 0
GNDTGNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
GNDT
R_OSD
BCL
GNDA
EHT
+5VU
P(D
P)
(uP)
77M8
K9650M
GNDO2
O1
I2
I1-
FI10
1
2
3
4
5
GND2
GND
QFWG3970M
91P0
* = see CT 17xxx partslist
(uP)
TDA8855H
4M433619
5M74
CTT5010
(P) (D
P)
(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
(P)
(P)
(P)
(P)
AV1
AV2
(A)
(A)(A
)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
(DP)
CRRO
MA
FRON
T-CO
NNEC
TOR
AV3
Y/CV
BS/A
V3
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
GNDSCLSDA
AM/A
F(A)
-V+V EW LFB
HDRI
VE
+8V
TO C
RT B
OARD
(uP)
(uP)
68p
CRT
FCB
BJ04
RF/FI/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSING -HF/FI INTERFACE PERITELEVISION/TRAITEMENT LUMINANCE CHROMINANCE - HF/ZF/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEOSIGNALVERARBEITUNG - RF/FI /PRESA PERITEL/ELABORAZIONE VIDEO - RF/FI /EUROCONECTOR/TRATAMENTO VIDEO
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
(AP).17000.00
10U0CS43
3U3CS46
10U0CS18
10U0CS17
220U0CS14
10U0CS67
10U0CS66
10U0CS65
10U0CS64
4U7CS75
4U7CS76
1U0CS77
1U0CS78
470U0CS84
470U0CS90
470U0CS91
470U0CS25
470U0
°1MI0
CS85
220U0CS22
1U0CS35
1U0CS50
1U0CS51
1U0CS52
1U0CS53
1U0CS82
100N0CS81
100N0CS47
100N0CS42
27R0RS05
4R7RS20
4R7RS87
22K0RS84
4R7RS88
22K0RS83
18R0RS12
BS90
12
BS91
12
10N0CS32
10N0CS23
1N0CS31
10N0CS15
820P0CS55
820P0CS54
820P0CS56
820P0CS57
1N0CS60
1N0CS61
1N0CS62
1N0CS63
1N0CS73
1N0CS92
1N0CS93
470P0CS80
2N2CS26
470P0CS79
1N0CS27 1N0
CS74470P0CS36
470P0CS39
1P0CS41
1N0CS94
1N0CS95
1N0CS24
47P0CS02
22N0CS01
47P0CS34
47P0CS33
1N0
CS13
1N0
CS12
1N0
CS11
1N0
CS10
1P0CS40
1N0
CS04
100N0CS87
100N0CS88
SicherheitsbauteilBei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwenden
N'utilisez que les pieces d'originePiece de securite
When repairing, use original part onlySafety Part
15U0LS41
15U0LS40
4U7LS10
2U2LS60
2U2LS61
2U2LS62
2U2LS63
NC
NCNCNC
ASG3
TESTEN
NC
NC
NCNCNC
I2S_DA_IN2
ADR_CLADR_WSADR_DA
I2S_DA_IN1
NC
NCNC
CAPL_AAHVSUP
SC2_OUT_RSC2_OUT_LVREF1SC1_OUT_RSC1_OUT_L
CAPL_MAHVSSAGNDC
SC3_IN_LSC3_IN_RASG2SC2_IN_LSC2_IN_RASG1SC1_IN_LSC1_IN_RVREFTOPMONO_INAVSSAVSUPANA_IN1+ANA_IN-ANA_IN2+
XTAL_INXTAL_OUT
DACM_LDACM_R
VREF2DACA_LDACA_RRESETQ
DVSSDVSUP
I2S_DA_OUTI2S_WSI2S_CLI2C_DAI2C_CL
STANDBYQADR_SEL
D_CTR_OUT0D_CTR_OUT1
AUD_CL_OUT
-
IS40
123456789
101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233
34353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364
4U7LS25
10U0LS20
1N0CS05
1N0CS06
1N0CS07
1N0CS08
1N0CS09
4N7CS59
BZX55C3V6DS90
BC847BTS01
BC847BTS81
18M432QS40
6K8RS54
18K0RS96
10K0RS92
100K0RS95
47R0RS41
6K8RS53
6K8RS52
6K8RS51
6K8RS50
470R0RS63
470R0RS62
470R0RS61
470R0RS60
100K0RS67
100K0RS66
100K0RS65
100K0RS64
4K7RS75
4K7RS76
4K7RS78
4K7RS77
IS40 = SUB AMVD 19100 00 => VIRTUAL DOLBY = SUB AMDP 17001 00 => DOLBY PROLOGIC = MSP 3410D-PP => STEREO / NICAM = MSP 3400C-PP-C5 => STEREO 2X10W
560R0RS86
560R0RS85
18K0RS93
1K0RS80
1K0RS79
10K0RS27
220R0RS29
47R0RS40
470R0RS43
470R0RS42
180R0RS04
6K8RS02
47R0RS03
1K5RS01
6K8RS55
100R0RS99
10K0RS90
+8V
+8V
1K0RS97
15K0RS98
-IS80
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
1011
BS80
BQ09
1
152 3 4 5
L
SDA
R
AV1_IN_R
-UA
AM/AF
AV1_OUT_R
AV2_OUT_L
AV2_OUT_R
AV1_OUT_L
AV2_IN_L
AV2_IN_R
AV1_IN_L
GND_HEATSINK
+UA
SCL
+5VON
AV3_R
MUTE-
+8V
SIFGNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDPGNDP
GNDP
GNDP
RESET_MSP-
GND-HEATSINK
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSSDVSS DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
15K0RS91
GNDP
AV3_L
GNDV
GNDV
GNDT AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSSAHVSSAHVSSAHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSSAHVSS
AHVSSAHVSS
AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS
AHVSS AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVS
S
AHVSSAHVSS
AHVS
S
AHVSS AHVSSAHVSS AHVSS
AHVSS AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSSAHVSS
AHVSS AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
TDA7269
(DP)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
MSP3400C-PP-C6
(FM-Stereo)
(P)
(P)(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(P)
GNDP
°VIRTUAL DOLBY
°VIRTUAL DOLBY
°
FCB
MAIN
BS02
BA002
12
2
3
13
GNDP
AMDP
4,8
25,4
4,2
14,61515
15
14,814,7
15
25,433
4,94,9
5
5
3,73,7
3,7
3,7
3,73,7
3,73,7
3,73,7
03,7
4,91,5
3,76,8
6,97,8
00
0,2
4,1
33
0,9
AMPLIFIER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - SCHEMA DE L’AMPLIFICATEUR - SCHALTBILD AUDIO-SIGNALVERABEITUNG - SCHEMA DELL’ AMPLIFICATOREESQUEMA DEL AMPLIFICADOR(STEREO)
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
29ICC17
30 First issue 07 / 98
+8V+8V
+8V
(AP).17002.00
10U0CS43
3U3CS46
10U0CS18
10U0CS17
220U0CS14
10U0CS67
10U0CS66
4U7CS76
1U0CS78
470U0CS84
470U0CS90
470U0CS25
1MI0CS85
220U0CS22
1U0CS35
1U0CS50
1U0CS51
1U0CS82
100N0CS81
100N0CS47
100N0CS42
18K0RS96
10K0RS92
100K0RS95
47R0RS41
6K8RS51
6K8RS50
470R0RS63
470R0RS62
100K0RS67
100K0RS66
4K7RS76
4K7RS78
4K7RS77
560R0RS86
560R0RS85
18K0RS93
1K0RS80
1K0RS79
10K0RS27
220R0RS29
47R0RS40
470R0RS43
470R0RS42
180R0RS04
6K8RS02
47R0RS03
1K5RS01
15K0RS98
1K0RS97
100R0RS99
10N0CS32
10N0CS23
1N0CS31
10N0CS15
820P0CS55
820P0CS54
1N0CS62
1N0CS63
1N0CS92
470P0CS80
2N2CS26
470P0CS79
1N0CS27 1N0
CS74
1P0CS41
1N0CS94
1N0CS24
47P0CS02
22N0CS01
47P0CS34
47P0CS33
1P0CS40
1N0
CS04
1N0CS73
1N0CS61
1N0CS60
1N0CS12
1N0CS13
0CS77
SicherheitsbauteilBei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwenden
N'utilisez que les pieces d'originePiece de securite
When repairing, use original part onlySafety Part
27R0RS05
4R7RS20
4R7RS87
22K0RS84
4R7RS88
22K0RS83
18R0RS12
NC
NCNCNC
ASG3
TESTEN
NC
NC
NCNCNC
I2S_DA_IN2
ADR_CLADR_WSADR_DA
I2S_DA_IN1
NC
NCNC
CAPL_AAHVSUP
SC2_OUT_RSC2_OUT_LVREF1SC1_OUT_RSC1_OUT_L
CAPL_MAHVSSAGNDC
SC3_IN_LSC3_IN_RASG2SC2_IN_LSC2_IN_RASG1SC1_IN_LSC1_IN_RVREFTOPMONO_INAVSSAVSUPANA_IN1+ANA_IN-ANA_IN2+
XTAL_INXTAL_OUT
DACM_LDACM_R
VREF2DACA_LDACA_RRESETQ
DVSSDVSUP
I2S_DA_OUTI2S_WSI2S_CLI2C_DAI2C_CL
STANDBYQADR_SEL
D_CTR_OUT0D_CTR_OUT1
AUD_CL_OUT
-
IS40
123456789
101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233
34353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364
4U7LS25
10U0LS20
1N0CS08
1N0CS07
1N0CS06
1N0CS05
4N7CS59
BZX55C3V6DS90
BC847BTS01
BC847BTS81
18M432QS40
15U0LS40
4U7LS10
15U0LS41
2U2LS63
2U2LS62
-IS80
1
2
3
45
6
789
10
11
100N0CS88
100N0CS87
BS90
1210K0RS90
15K0RS91
SDA
AV1_IN_R
-UA
AM/AF
AV1_OUT_R
AV1_OUT_L
AV1_IN_L
GND_HEATSINK
+UA
SCL
+5VON
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSSDVSS DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSS
DVSSMUTE-
+8V
SIF
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
GNDP
RESET_MSP-
GND-HEATSINK
GNDV
GNDT
AHVSS
AHVSSAHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSSAHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSSAHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSSAHVSS
AHVS
S
AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSSAHVSS
AHVSS AHVSS
AHVSS
AHVSS
R
TDA7269
(DP)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
(OS)
MSP3400C-PP-C6
(P)
(P)(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(uP)
(P)
GNDP
MAIN
AMPLIFIER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - SCHEMA DE L’AMPLIFICATEUR - SCHALTBILD AUDIO-SIGNALVERABEITUNG - SCHEMA DELL’ AMPLIFICATORE - ESQUEMA DEL AMPLIFICADOR(MONO)
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
LS25
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part of board connected to mains supply.Partie du châssis reliée au secteur.Primärseite des Netzteils.Parte dello châssis collegata alla rete.Parte del chassis conectada a la red.
Use isolating mains transformer - Utiliser un transformateur isolateur du secteur -Trenntrafo verwenden - Utilizar un transformador aislador de red -Utilizzare un trasformatore per isolarvi dalla rete
!
DP72 CP97
FI30°
LS10
LX18
IP95DP80
LS25
FI50CP84
CP82
CP80DP82
DP84
IX01BP
01
BX02BX01
QC02
QR01
QC01FI
20
BL02
BV01
IF01
FI10
FI02JF14
DL12
FI01
BP15
RP76
LP44
QS40
FP01
PP64
IS40
BF01
BR01
NH01
RP92
CP92
IV01
DP85
focus
BX50G2/cutoff
° it is not necessary , to adjust FI30 by after sales
4Mhz
5,74Mhz
77,8Mhz
DST5V
U-U
UP
+UA
ON+5V
T 2.5A L
5V
TimerU
8V
U
SYS
U-
ON+5V
+5V
-UA
VIDEO
STBY
140 265V (ASIA)
190 264V (EUR)
31,9Mhz
40,4Mhz4,433619Mhz
3,579545Mhz
LOCATION OF CONTROLS - EMPLACEMENT DES REGLAGES -SERVICE LAGEPLAN - POSIZIONE REGOLATORI DI SERVIZIO -
SITUACIÓN DE LOS AJUSTES
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
Tube Format Usys Jumper RL65A51EFS83X191 4:3 126V+/-0,5V JL80 4k7A59EHJ43X15 4:3 132V+/-0,5V JL81 24kA66EHJ43X15 4:3 132V+/-0,5V JL81 24kA59EGD048X30 4:3 126V+/-0,5V JL80 4k7A68EGD038X30 4:3 126V+/-0,5V JL80 4k7A68AGA25X01 4:3 126V+/-0,5V JL80 4k7A80AEJ15X01 4:3 126V+/-0,5V JL80 4k7W56EGV023X015 16:9 138V+/-0,5V JL82 47kW66EGV023X015 16:9 138V+/-0,5V JL82 47kW76EGV023X015 16:9 138V+/-0,5V JL82 47k
V=
U Sys PP 64DP 80
CP 80
U G2 / cutoff
FOCUS
SCREEN
FOCUS
AV (no Signal, black screen)
Test pattern(standard values)
highest output
CRT IB01: pins 9 / 12 / 15
Sharp picture
V= IF Alignment
Alignement FI
FI 01
FI 02
Switch set to standard BG Commuter le TV au standard BG Adjust FI01 for minimum value at 40,4Mhz
Adjust FI20 for minimum value at 31,9Mhz
IF Signal 40,4MHz (BG)31,9MHz (BG)
50 mV
RI33
1
FI20
V= RI41 DI40
1
TUNER
NH01 75Ω
11
G
1nF
trap 40,4Mhz
trap 31,9Mhz
0
160V
+ + = 50%
+ + = 50%
LL05
FI10
ADJUSTMENTS - REGLAGES - EINSTELLUNGEN - REGOLAZIONI - AJUSTES
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
SERVICE MODE
I - ENTER/EXIT SERVICE MODE - ENTREE/SORTIE DU MODE SERVICE
1 ACCESSING THE SERVICE MODE
2 TEMPORARY EXIT FROM SERVICE MODE
TV Control Panel Access
• Switch the TV into “Standby” mode by pressing the Standby button onthe RCU.
• Switch “OFF” the mains supply to the TV and wait for the LED to extinguish.
• Whilst holding depressed the PR - and VOL- (8s), switch “ON” the mains supply to the TV.
• Once initialised, the Main Service Menu will appear on the screen of the TV.
3 EXITING FROM SERVICE MODE
1 ACCES AU MODE SERVICE
2 SORTIE TEMPORAIRE DU MODE SERVICE
Accès avec le clavier du téléviseur
- Utiliser la touche Exit de la télécommande.- Le menu utilisateur peut être accessible via la touche «Menu».
- Pour entrer à nouveau dans le mode service utliliser la touche bleue.
Note :
En mode service:- Le verrouillage parental est effacé ( réinitialisé ).- La fonction de verrouillage ( Pin number ) est ignorée.- La programmation des heures «reveille/matin» est annulée.- Possibilité de passer en mode service avec commutation lente active.- AV- Link , la détection WSS, l’EPG et le Vidéotexte ne sont pas validés.- La fonction de stand-by automatique en cas d’absence de signald’antenne n’est pas validée.- Les valeurs de réglages usine sont affectées au contraste, à lacouleur et à la lumière.- Le contour est appelé à sa valeur moyenne.- L’expansion contraste est au niveau bas.- Le mode ambiance «Light sensor» n’est pas valides.- Zoom et format ignorées.
• Commuter le téléviseur en position de veille avec la télécommande.Eteindre le téléviseur par l’interrupteur secteur (attendre l’extinction complète du voyant).
• Tout en appuyant sur les touches PR - et VOL - , mettre le TV en service à l'aide de la touche M/A.
• Maintenir enfoncées les touches PR - et VOL -. (8s)Le menu suivant apparaît.
- Aller au point «QUIT» dans le menu principaldu mode service.
3 SORTIE DEFINITIVE DU MODE SERVICE
télécommande clavier du téléviseur Inter M/A ou Stand-by
- Foncion Stand-by ou«off» par M/A
- Mode TV.
Les valeurs ou réglages non mémorisées avant lasortie ne seront pas écrites en NVM.
Please Note:
In the service mode :- The CHILD LOCK function is re-initialised.The LOCK function (PIN
number) is ignored.- All Wake-up/Sleep timer settings are CLEARED.- SCART socket pin 8 switching voltages are ignored.- AV-Link, WSS Detection, EPG and TELETEXT functions are
disabled.- Automatic standby mode switching functions (no signal conditions)
are disabled.- Brightness, Colour and Contrast are set to factory defaults.- Sharpness settings are set to MID position.- Contrast Expand is set to LOW.- Automatic INSTALL mode is disabled.- FORMAT and ZOOM are reset to factory defaults.
- Press the “EXIT” button on the RCU.- Pressing the “MENU” button on the RCU will activate the customer
menus.
- The Service Menu can be re-entered by pressing the “BLUE” button on the RCU.
- Select the “QUIT” line of the “Main ServiceMenu”.
Remote Control TV Control Panel ON/OFF key or “Stand-by”buttons
- RCU “Standby” button or switch “OFF”mains supply.
- TV mode.
Values or adjustment not “STORED” before exitingthe service mode will NOT be “SAVED” in the NVM.
GB MODE SERVICE F
Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071
GEOMETRYVIDEO
IF
TUBEQUIT
SETUP
Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071
GEOMETRYVIDEO
IF
TUBEQUIT
SETUP
-Appuyer sur «VOL+» - Appuyer sur «<»,«OK» ou «>»- Press «VOL.+»button
- Press «<», «OK»or «>» button
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
PR
+
+
- -
III - LITE-MENU FOR FIELD SERVICE MODE - MENUS DU MODE SERVICE
1 MAIN MENU - MENU PRINCIPAL
Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071
GEOMETRYVIDEOIF
TUBEQUIT
SETUP
Version software
Versión softwareVersione software
Software Version
Software Version
CounterCompteurBetriebsstundenzählerContadorContatore
GerätekonfigurationComposizione del ricevitore
Configuration du récépteurChassis Configuration codes.
Composición del Receptor
UP
DOWN
SELECT
Serial Number
AlignmentAlignementAbgleichRegolazioneAlineacion
N° de sérieSerien-Nr.Numero serialeN° Serie
Navigation inside the Service ModeNavigation dans le Service ModeFunktionen im Service ModeOpzioni del Service ModeBúsqueda en el Modo Servicio
TV CONFIGURATION - CONFIGURATION DU TV - GERÄTEKONFIGURATION -CONFIGURAZIONE DEL TV - CONFIGURACIÕN DEL TV
Character 1 : Tube type : «A»= 4/3 , «W» =16/9Character 2 : Chassis type : «5» = 50Hz, Character 3 : Zoom available : «Z»=yes, «-»=not Character 4 : Ambiant Sensor : «S»= detected, «-»= notCharacter 5 : Dolby : «D»=detected, «-»= notCharacter 6 : AV Link detected : «K»=IR link detected, «-»= notCharacter 7 : Chassis Variant: «N»= Nicam, «S»=Stereo
Character 1 : Factory : «A»= Angers , «C» =Celle, «T» =TaranconCharacter 2 : Year : «G» = 1996, «H»= 1997 etc..Character 3 : Month, from : «1»=January to «C»=DecemberCharacter 4-9 : Serial N0.
TIME COUNTER - COMPTEUR DE TEMPS - BETRIEBSSTUNDENZÄHLER -CONTATORE - CONTADORThe counter indicates the TV’s number of service hours.It counts from to 0 to 65535 hours.The display is hexadecimal.Le compteur de temps indique le nombre d’heures de service du TV. Il compte de 0 à 65535heures. L’affichage est en hexadécimal.Der Zähler zeigt an, wieviele Stunden der Fernseher in Betrieb ist. Die Anzeige isthexadezimal.Il contatore indica il numero di ore di servizio del TV. Puo’ contatore da 0 a 65535. Lavisualizzazione è esadecimale.El contador indica el número de horas de servicio de la TV. Cuenta de 0 a 65535 horas. Elvisualizador es hexadecimal.
2 SUBMENU - SOUS-MENU
VIDEO PAL BG
R-DriveG-DriveB-Drive
Norm.
Peak-White
Return
DefaultStoreRestore
Drive Adjust.
Scale BrightScale ColourScale Contr.
Factory
9C9C9C
705CCC
Hexadecimal valueValeur hexadecimale de reglageAbgleichwerte hexadezimalValore di regolazione esadecimaleValor del ajuste en hexadecimal
Navigation inside the Service ModeNavigation dans le Service ModeFunktionswahl im Service ModeOpzioni del Service ModeBusquena en el Modo Servicio
Case de validation - Fonction validée si "cochée"
Per inserire la FunzioneActivar una functión
Enable a function
Zum Implementieren einer Funktion
Config. A1Z-DKC
Serial-N0. AI6------
ROM Default All the default values of a page in use are stored in RAM.L’ensemble des valeurs par défaut d’une page courante est chargé en RAM.Sämtliche Standardwerte der aktuellen Seite werden imRAM geladenTutti i valori di default di una pagina in uso vengono memorizzati sulla RAMTodos los valores por defecto de la página en curso están almacenados en RAM.
Restore Copies all values from NVM into RAM.Copie toutes les valeurs des données NVM en RAMKopiert alle NVM-Datenwerte in den RAMCopiare tutti i valori da NVM sulla RAMCopia todos los valores de NVM a RAM
To enable a function check (tick) the box.Pour valider une fonction cocher la case correspondante Zum Implementieren einer Funktion das Kontrollkästchen aktivieren (ankreuzen)Per implementare una funzione di verifica, (vistare) la casellaPara poner en fucionamiento una función verifique (señale) la casilla
: :Enable function : Disable function
Display + > NVM value
1
Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071
GEOMETRYVIDEO
IF
TUBEQUIT
SETUP
Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071
GEOMETRYVIDEO
IF
TUBEQUIT
SETUP
REMOTE CONTROL - TELECOMMANDE - FERNBEDIENUNGTELECOMANDO - MANDO A DISTANCIA
3 DISPLAYING THE VALUE OF THE SETTING - AFFICHAGE DESVALEURS - ANZEIGE DES EINSTELL WERTS
VISUALIZZAZIONE DEL VALORE DELLA REGOLAZIONE -VISUALIZACION DEL VALOR DE AJUSTE
H-Position 0E
Display - < NVM value
Hexadecimal valuevaleur hexadécimaleEinstell wert hexadezimalValore esadecimaleValor héxadecimal
Set value
: NVM value
> <
Store Copîes RAM values into NVMCopie la valeur RAM en NVM Kopieren des Werts von RAM nach NVMCopiare i valori RAM in NVMCopiar valores RAM en NVM
5 STORING VALUES IN MEMORY - MEMORISATION DESVALEURS - SPEICHERN DER WERTE - MEMORIZZAEZ IVALORI - VALORES ALMACENADOS EN LA MEMORIA
After setting, the values are stored in NVM.Après réglages les valeurs sont mémorisées en NVM.Nach dem Einstellen werden die Werte im NVM gespeichert.Dopo la regolazione i valori vengono memorizzati in NVM.Después del ajuste, los valores son almacenados en NVM
The box becomes During alignment, values are temporarily stored in RAM.En cours d’alignement les valeurs sont mémorisées temporairement en RAM Während des Abgleichs werden die Werte vorübergehend im RAM gespeichertDurante l’allineamento i valori vengono memorizzati provvisoriamente sulla RAMDurante el ajuste, los valores son almacenados temporalmente en RAM
4 TOGGLE FUNCTIONS - VALIDATION DES FONCTIONSEIN-UND AUSSCHALT FUNKTIONEN - FUNZIONI DI
COMMUTAZIONE - FUNCION CONMUTACION
00 to FF
II - NAVIGATION INSIDE THE SERVICE MODE - DEPLACEMENT DANS LE MODE SERVICEFUNCTIONS WALLIN SERVICE MODE - OPZIONI NEL SERVICE MODE - BUSQUEDA EN MODO SERVICIO
Naviagation up Naviagation down
- Select option- Option anwählen- Selezionare l’opzione- Seleccionar opción
- “Change“ value - Wert “änden“ - “Cambiare“ valore- “Cambiar“ valor
2 TV CONTROL PANEL - CLAVIER TV - TASTATUR DESFERNSEHGERÄTS - COMANDI DEL TELEVISORE -
Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071
GEOMETRYVIDEO
IF
TUBEQUIT
SETUP
Naviagation up
Soft-Ver. V1.00-0 0080Config. A5- - - -NSerial-No. 103465071
GEOMETRYVIDEO
IF
TUBEQUIT
SETUP
Naviagation down
- Select option- Option anwählen- Selezionare l’opzione- Seleccionar opción
- “Change“ value - Wert “änden“ - “Cambiare“ valore- “Cambiar“ valor VALUE
VALUE Vol. +
-Vol.
GEOMETRY FULL SCREEN
H-Delay
V-BlankingV-Amplitude
Return
UP
System Voltage -3BH-VCO
DOWN CHANGE
+1B-231E
+0AV-Position 1B
GEOMETRY ZOOM0
H-Blanking Symmetry
UP
H-Blanking
DOWN CHANGE
+3B-19
DefaultStoreRestore
PR
+
+
- -
VALUE
VALUE >
<
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07/ 98
GEOMETRY MODE ALIGNMENT
4/3 picture tube
Signal : 4/3 test pattern
4 / 3 standard mode
zoom 0
overscan V=107% , H=107%
<4/3> zoom 1
16 / 9 standard mode
zoom 0
overscan V=120% , H=120%
16 / 9standard mode
zoom 0
Adjust the vertical height until V = 80%
<16 / 9> zoom 1
Adjust the vertical height : V =90%
16/9 picture tube
Signal : 4/3 test pattern
overscan V=107%, H =107%
4-Adjust EW Amplitude ,EW Shape and Trapezium
1- Adjust Vertical position and Vertical amplitude2- Adjust Vertical Blanking and linearity
3- Adjust Horizontal position and Horizontal ampltude
1- Adjust Vertical position and Vertical amplitude2- Adjust Vertical Blanking and linearity
3- Adjust Horizontal position and Horizontal ampltude
4-Adjust EW Amplitude ,EW Shape and Trapezium
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE - PROCESSUS DE REGLAGES - ABGLEICH - VISUALIZZAZIONE DEL VALORE DELLA REGOLAZIONE - PROCEDIMIENTO DE ALINEACION
SETUP
Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”.Press </> on the RCU or VOL+/VOL- on TV front panel.
Retourne au menu principal.
Definit le tube exact après changement de NVM.Les nouvelles valeurs de tubes (avec video et géometrie) sont actives de suite.Les paramètres de vidéo et de géométrie sontchargés en NVM lorsque STORE est sélectionné. Voir liste ci-dessous.
TUBE
Return
Tube type
After setting Store (+)
TUBE
Restore
Return
Tube type A66ECY...
Store
SETUP
WSS
Default
Default
Store
ReturnClear Progs.
Kbd. Config.
GEOMETRY
Blanking On
V-Amplitude
ReturnV- Slope
DefaultStoreRestore
V-Position
VIDEO PAL BG
R-DriveG-DriveB-Drive
Norm.
Peak-White
Return
IF
StoreDefault
FFI - Bit
RestoreDefaultStoreRestore
Return
GEOMETRY
S -Correction
H-Position
EW -Trapezium
EW -Amplitude
EW -Shape
H-Amplitude
Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb.
Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode.Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece.
Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”.Press </> on the RCU or VOL+/VOL- on TV front panel.Retourne au menu principal.
Return
Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb.
Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode.Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece.
Scegliere il tubo appropriato dopo aver sostituito la NVM; i 6 caratteri che indicano il nuovo tipo di tubo, richiamano i valori video e geometria didefault. I parametri per video e geometria vengono caricati nella NVM
Definir el tubo correcto después de haber cambiado el NVM.6 caracteres.Los nuevos valores de tipo de tubo (con la vídeo y la geometría por defecto) se activan inmediatamente. Los parámetros variables de geometría y vídeo se graban en el NVM al seleccionar la función Store. Vea más abajo la lista de tubos.
Recalls the factory settings for colour, brightness, contrast and sharpness and sets contrast expand to "low".
Factory settings recalled
VIDEO PAL
Normalise User Settings
FFi - BitUser settings kept.
IF
Scal.Brightness
Scal*.Colour
Scal.Contrast
Grey scale test pattern
R-Cut off*
G-Cut off*
R - Drive
G - Drive
B - Drive
Peak-White**
grey
+ =nom.
white =100%
+
+ + =nom.
Grey scale test pattern
+ =nom.
white =100%
Peek white test patternwhite =100%
+
white
+ = 50%
= 100%
Grey scale test pattern
PAL (then SECAM +RGB) 75% Colour bar test pattern via RF.
factory settings.
white =100%
black
+ =nom.+
Blue Cathode
=
CRT
F-H
After setting Store (+)
The signals colour standard is auto detected and displayed opposite the main menu line.
CRT Pin 6,8,11
Tube Type [init]
A80AEJ (340max)
(610max)(560max)
240
520480
Tube Type [init]
A51EFS
A59EHJA59EGDA66EHJ
(600max)
(540max)(470max)(430max)
420
380400300
Blue cathodeBlue cathode
GEOMETRY
V-Position
V-Amplitude
V-Blanking
Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”.Retourne au menu principal.
Return
Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb.
Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode.Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece.
Test Pattern Signal used: 4/3 with geometric circle. Adjust separate for 4/3 and 16/9 format. See annexed
After setting Store (+)
Verlassen des Untermenüs,das Hauptmenü
Nach Tausch des NVM den bildröhrentyp (6 Ziffern) auswählen. Die neuen Geometrie-und Video-defaultwerte werden sofort aktiv. Variable Geometrie- und Videowerte werden durch Speichern mit "STORE" ins NVM geschrieben. Bildrohrauflistung : siehe unten.
Automatic detection of DOLBY surround sound and 16/9 Format pictures via Teletext line number 23 is valid on all programmes.
Sélection du process WSS valid pour tous programmes
WSS
detect.enable- aktiv disable-inaktiv
WSS (nur bei 16:9 oder Dolby)Auswertung der Zeile 23 zur automatischenFormat umschaltung und Dolby umschaltung
Idendificazione "auto-surround" e "format" tramiteil televideo, decodificando la riga 23. La selezionedi WSS è valida per tutti i programmi.
Detección "auto-surround" y "format" a través de la línea 23 de Teletext.La selección del procesamiento WSS es válida para todos los programas.
Clears all programmes STORED in memory and RESETS all PICTURE and SOUND settings to the factory default values.The AUTO INSTALL (out of factory) mode can be initialised by a long press (> 5sec.) of the selection button.
Efface tous les programmes mémorisés.valeurs SON et IMAGES: valeurs usines.Pour sortir des valeurs usine : Selection : Long press:2,5s
Clear Prog.
Kbd. Config
Kbd. Config
active-aktiv No active-inaktiv
Löscht alle Programme und ersetzt alle Ton-und Bildeinstellungen durch Fabrikwerte. Nach erneutemEinschalten erscheint das Installationsmenü.Anwahl: 2,5s drücken
Clear Prog.Cancella tutti i programmi in memoria.I Valori analogici SUONO E IMMAGINE vengono riportatia livello di default. Per ristabilire le condizioni di uscita fabbrica, selezionare la funzione e premere per 2,5sec
Programa de borrado.Borra todos los programas almacenados en la memoria.Valores análogos de SOUND PICTURE: valores de fábrica.Regreso a la TV para "salir del modo fábrica".Selección: Presión larga igual a 2,5 s.
Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”.Retourne au menu principal.
Return
Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb.
Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode.Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece.
Verlassen des Untermenüs Verlassen des Untermenüs
Verlassen des Untermenüs
* * After PEAK white adjustment control cut off setting. Repeat the adjustments if necessary. Nach der Einstellung von "Peak white" die "Cut off"- Einstellungen wiederholen.
Note :* adjust separate for PAL/NTSC/SECAM and RGB/AV getrennte Einstellung für PAL/SEACAM und RGB/AV
Restore
S - CorrectionH-PositionH-AmplitudeEW-AmplitudeEW-Trapezium
7C6C
5494707898
7CDrive Adjust. AGC Take Over
Scale BrightScale ColourScale Contr.
Factory
9C9C9C
705CCC
88
Tube Name LIST name Description
A51EFS83X191 A51EFS 4:3; 21” OT; AK-Mask; Coty-MA59EHJ43X15 A59EHJ 4:3; 25” MP; AK-Mask; VectorA66EHJ43X15 A66EHJ 4:3; 28” MP; AK-Mask; VectorA68EGD038X30 A68EGD 4:3; 29” SF; Invar; VectorA80AEJ13X01 A80AEJ 4:3; 33” MP AK-Mask; Coty-MA59EGD048X30 A59EGD 4:3; 25” SF; Invar-Mask; VectorA68AGA25X01 A68AGA 4:3; 29” VHP; AK-Mask; Coty-MW56EGV023X015 W56EGV 16:9; 24” SF; Invar-Mask; VectorW66EGV023X015 W66EGV 16:9; 28” SF; Invar-Mask; VectorW76EGV023X015 W76EGV 16:9; 32” SF; Invar-Mask; Vector
S
AGC - Minimum noise- Minimum de bruit- Minimum Rauschen- Rumore minimo- Minimo ruido
A68EGD
1.Sélectionner le mode zoom standard 4/3 pour tube 4/3
2.appliquer une MIRE de BARRE avec seulement une ligne blanche horizontale en milieu de l'ecran
3.Positinner dans le mode Service Blanking On la moitié basse de l' ecran devient noire
4.Aligner "Vertical - Slope" pour que la ligne mediane soit a peine non visible
5 Revenir à Blanking On et mettre
6.Positioner la mire de quadrillage
7.Effectuer les reglages de geometrie d'écrits ci- dessous
9.Regler la position H
10.Ajuster l'amplitude H
11-12.Correction de coussin EW
13.Correction de coins (Shape)
Correct incorrect
"Pour les tubes 4/3 en mode 16/9, ces reglages ne sont pas necessaire"
1.Select the standard 4:3 format and zoom mode 0.
2.Apply a test pattern signal to the TV with a single horizontal and vertical line on the screen.
3.Select “Blanking On” line of the menu and ENABLE (tick) the function, the bottom half of the screen will go black.
1.Selezionare il modo zoom standard 4/3 per tubo 4/3
4.Select the “V_Slope” line of the menu and adjust its value until the centre line of the pattern is just invisible.
5.Return to the “Blanking On” line of the menu and DISABLE (un-tick) the function.
6.Switch the test pattern signal to the crosshatch geometry pattern.
7.Perform the geometry adjustments described below.
9.Adjust position H.
10.Adjust amplitude H.
11-12.Correction of EW pincushion distortion.
13.Correction of corners (Shape).
14.Trapeze. / Trapèze
"These adjustments are not necessary for 4:3 tubes in 16:9 mode"
2.Applicare un monoscopio con un'unica linea bianca orizzontale al centro dello schermo
3.Posizionarsi in modo Service Blanking on; la parte inferiore dello schermo divienta nera
5.Ritornare in modo Blanking on e porre
6.Posizionare il monoscopio
7.Effettuare le regolazioni di geometria descritte in precedenza
/Memorizzare/Memoriser
9.Regolare la posizione H
10 Regolare l'ampiezza H
11-12.Correzione della distorsione a cuscino EW
13.Correzione degli angoli (Forma)
"Queste regolazioni non sono necessarie per tubi 4/3 in modo 16/9"
4.Allineare la "Vertical Slope" in modo che la linea centrale sia appena visibile
8.Store
350
W56EGVW66EGVW76EGV 300
(410max)
(350max)
Riservato alla regolazione di fabbrica
Factory adjusted Reserve au reglage usine
Asie
Europ
Default
Fast filter (IF /PLL) Filtre rapide (FI /PLL)
Filtro rapido (IF /PLL)
1.Seleccione el modo de zoom estándar 4/3 para tubo 4/3.
2.Aplique una plantilla de prueba con sólo una línea blanca horizontal en el centro de la pantalla.
3.Pase al modo Service Blanking On. La mitad inferior de la pantalla se vuelve negra.
4.Alinee "Vertical-Slope" para que la línea mediana sea casi invisible.
5.Vuelva a "Blanking on" y poner
6.Coloque la plantilla cuadriculada.
7.Efectúe los ajustes geométricos descritos más abajo.
/Almacene
9.Ajuste la posición H
10.Ajuste la amplitud H
11-12.Corrección de la distorsión de cojín EW.
13.Corrección de esquinas (Shape)
14.Trapezio / Trapecio
"Estos ajustes no son necesarios para los tubos 4/3 en modo 16/9"
1.Wählen Sie den Standard-Zoom 4:3 bei 4:3 Bildröhren.
2.Speisen Sie ein Testbild mit nur einem horizontalen Strich in der Bildmitte ein.
3.Schalten Sie den Blanking-Mode ein. Die untere Hälfte des Bildschirms wird schwarz.
4.Regeln Sie "V-Slope" so ein, dafl die Mittellinie nahezu verschwindet.
5.Schalten Sie den Blanking-Mode wieder ein und
6.Speisen Sie ein Gittertestbild ein.
7.Nehmen Sie die Geometrieeinstellung wie unten beschrieben vor:
9.Korrigieren Sie Horizontale Lage.
10.Korrigieren Sie Horizontal-Amplitude
11-12.Korrektur der Ost/West Kissenverzerrung.
13.Korrektur der Ecken.
14 Trapez-Verzerrung.
Reserviert für fabrikeinstellungen
“Diese Einstellungen sind nicht für 4:3 Bildröhren im 16:9 Betrieb erforderlich.“
/Speichern
des service Modes erscheint
Schnelles filter (ZF/PLL)
After replacing the NVM, the correct tube type number must be entered (6 characters).Once entered, the tubes geometry and video default vales are immediately activated.Variable geometry and video parameters are written to the NVM when the “STORE” line is selected.See table below for tube type numbers.
Press </> on the RCU or VOL+/VOL- on TV front panel.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
+8V
PINS of IC 64 33
1 32
AN
AIN
-A
NA
IN2
+
PINS of IC
AGND
DGND
AGND
DG
ND
3 4 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
2 51
BS001
220N0CS101
1N0
CS103
10N0
CS104
CS105
100N0
CS203
1N0
10N0
CS204
CS205
100N0
XT
AL
OU
TX
TA
LIN
+5VDA
NA
IN1
+
AGND
+5VD
AGND
AD
RS
EL
3 4 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
2 51
BS002
+5
VA
AG
ND
+8
V
CS20210N0
+5VA
DGND
+5VD
CS
20
71
00
N0
10
U0
CS
20
6
SC
1IN
RS
C1
INL
SC
2IN
RS
C2
INL
SC
3IN
RS
C3
INL
CA
PL
M
CA
PL
AS
C1
OU
TL
SC
1O
UT
R
SC
2O
UT
LS
C2
OU
TR
AG
ND
C
SC
4IN
R
SC
4IN
L
I2C
DA
I2C
CL
1N0
CS106
+5VDDGND
+5VD
MO
NO
INV
RE
FT
OP DGND
1011121314151617181920212223242526
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
4546474849
5
5051525354555657585960
61
62
64
65
66
67 8
STANDBYQVREF2 ADRSEL
AUDCLOUT
XTALOUTXTALINTESTEN
AVSUP
SC1OUTLSC1OUTRVREF1VREF1SC2OUTLSC2OUTRASG3
VREF2
AHVS
S
27
AVSU
PAV
SSAV
SSM
ONOI
NVR
EFTO
PVR
EFTO
PSC
1INR
SC1I
NLAS
G1SC
2INR
SC2I
NLAS
G2SC
3INR
SC3I
NLAG
NDC
AHVS
S
44
NP
NPNPNP
7 963 2 3 4 6
I2CC
LI2
CDA
I2SC
LI2
SWS
I2SD
AOU1
I2SD
AIN1
NPDVSU
PDV
SUP
DVSS
DVSS
I2SD
AIN2
RESE
TQI2
SDAO
U2
68 1
NC NC NC
DACC2RDACC2L
DACC1RDACC1L
CAPLC2AHVSUPAHVSUP
DCTRIO0DCTRIO1
DCTRIN
NCNCNC
CAPLC1
DPL3518(DIE)
IS200
DGND
RE
SE
TQ
DA
CM
RD
AC
ML
DA
CA
LD
AC
AR
1
111213141516171819
2
2021222324252627
28
29
3
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
4
40
41
42
43
44
45
46474849
5
50515253545556575859
6
6061
65
66
67
68
69 770
71
72 8 9
AVSUP
STANDBYQ
TESTEN
ADRSELDCTROUT0DCTROUT1
AUDCLOUTDMACSYNC
XTALOUTXTALIN
ANAIN2+ANAIN-
ANAIN1+AVSUP
AHVSSCAPLMAHVSUPAVHSUPCAPLASC1OUTLSC1OUTRVREF1VREF1SC2OUTLSC2OUTRASG3TESTNEUDACMSUBDACMLDACMRVREF2VREF2
AVSS
AVSS
MON
OIN
VREF
TOP
VREF
TOP
SC1I
NRSC
1INL
ASG0
SC2I
NRSC
2INL
ASG1
SC3I
NRSC
3INL
ASG3
SC4I
NRSC
4INL
AGND
CAH
VSS
DVSU
P
I2CC
LI2
CDA
I2SC
LI2
SWS
I2SD
AOU1
I2SD
AIN1
ADRD
A
ADRW
SAD
RCL
DVSU
P
DVSS
DVSS
I2SD
AIN2
RESE
TQDA
CAR
DACA
L
NP
NP
NPNPNP
106263
MSP3410D(DIE)
IS100
10N0CS102DGND
1
TP2
DGND1 TP1
SUB AMVD 19100 00
SUB AUDIO MODULE VIRTUAL DOLBY
SUB AMVD
SUB AUDIO SIGNAL MODULE - SUB MODULE AUDIO - AUDIO SIGNAL SUBMODUL - SUB MODULO AUDIO
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Chassis concerned : ICC17 (25"MP & 28"MP)
Symptom/ Problem observed :Spare Parts List, component part number amendment.
Solution implemented :To optimize the CRT heater supply voltage for the above mentioned tubes, both LL05(DST) and LB02 (coil) have been changed.
LL05 : Old Part No. 10546610 ---> New Part No. 10600190LB02 : Old Part No. 10477930 ---> New Part No. 25349470
Comment :Both components must be replaced at the same time.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Finished products / Chassis concerned :All TV sets equiped with ICC17 chassis (CRT Board)
Subject : Protection of transistor TB02 against arcing
Symptom/ Problem observed :Transistor type number BF422 used in position TB02 found defective.
Cause :Arcing.
Solution implemented :- Remove the resistor at location RB13.- On the copper side of the CRT PCB, add an insulated wire link between pin 1 of inductor LB02 and
pin 4 of the CRT socket (ground).
You do not need to write anything in the white boxes.
IRIS CODE: the code mentioned below must be used to report this failure on the warranty sheet. It will make your report easier and more reliable
1 3 1 5 R B 1 3 AP Y TV
Condition/Symptom Part No Position SectionQty
FaultCode
RepairCode
10533820CRT 17000 00
LB01
LB71
LB31
LB51
DB50
LB02
1
BB03
RB11
RB02
RB07
RB08
RB05
DB51
DB30
DB31DB70
DB71
TB02EB
C
BB01
1
TB01BCE
LB06
1
CB01
IB01
DB04
RB12
RB13
RB01
RB04
RB31
RB71
RB03
RB51
CB04
BB02 1
BB05
CB06
CB03
BB06
BB04
N P Q R
0
1
2
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Chassis concerned : ICC17
Symptom/ Problem observed :Moiré patterning visible on some channels.
Cause :High frequency cross modulation.
Solution implemented - Remove the jumper link at location JR06.- Remove the inductor at location LR20.- Replace LR10 10µH inductor with a jumper link.
DR23
DR20
DR10
CR99
BR07
BR06
RV31
RV30
RR70
RR72
RR74
RR76
RR78
RR58
RR50
RR51RR
71RR
73RR
75
RR77
RR82
RR45
RR04
RR57
RP76
BS80
1
RS88RV01
S91
CS90
JR03
JR04JR05
JS15
JR12JR11
JR10
0 0
JR13
JR06
BS91
1
BS90
1
LR10
LR20
QR01
BV01
1
JV04
JR02
JR01
JX94
JR07
BS02
CP72
CV08
CR10
CP73
BR01
1
LV07
J K L MJ K L M
10516550/A
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
15NCH95
CH211p
CH221p
CH230.75P
CH501P5
CH511P5
CH521P5
CH531P5
8PCH24
BB535DH07
BB639CDH35
47PCH25
CH200.75P
100PCH55
10K0RH93
100KRH15
10KRH13
1NCH89
RH1447K
47KRH73
10NCH59
1NCH88
33RRH72
1NCH81
15NCH56
4N7CH91
220RRH55
330RRH56
BA592DH45
4K7RH91
10KRH51
100RRH53
22KRH52
CH7033N
1NCH48
100PCH14
1NCH47
22nCH85
2R2RH88
10KRH71
22PCH93
180RRH70
100PCH13
4R7RH80
CH7918P
22KRH38
CH7610N 1N
CH78
InterfaceI2C-Bus
OscillatorCrystal
DividerRef.-
DividerProgr.
HYPVHF
Mixer
Amplifier
Isolation
UHFM
ixer
Amplifier
Isolation
I/O-PORTSChgPm
pDet.&
PHASE-
Oscillator VHF/HYPOscillator UHF
TUA6010XIH701
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1415
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
82PCH33
4N7CH92
22KRH44 22K
RH43
BB639CDH44
BA592DH70
22NCH35
22PCH75
0P75CH43
CH45220P
22KRH12
BB639CDH34S595TR
TH30
1K2RH59
22KRH45
CH44470P
BB639CDH33
CH381N
27RRH37
3U9RH94
4N7CH39
10NCH49
15RRH92
BB639CDH43
22KRH41
3K9RH03
10NCH90
2R2RH42
S595TRTH40
4R7RH49
S595TRTH01
47RRH09
1PCH07
1NCH06
BB535DH05
22KRH10
9PCH08
VALCH42
100PCH09
22KRH11
BB535DH06
100PCH12
5P6CH28
9PCH11
39KRH50
10PCH05
1NCH36
1NCH37
470KRH01
470KRH36
470KRH33
5V6DH47
100PCH04
22KRH06
22KRH05
BB535DH02
BB535DH03
22KRH04
12PCH03
4P7CH02
470RRH46
3K9RH08
CH321N
BB639CDH32
BB639CDH31
22KRH02
1NCH34
22KRH32
BB639CDH41
BB639CDH42
CH711N
22KRH39
22NCH29
1RRH30
1nFCH72
4MHzQH70
CH3110N
150KRH35
150KRH34
150KRH07
CH4022N
100PCH54
82PCH17
22KRH31
4N7CH96
1NCH94
4K7RH58
56RRH87
6K8RH85
4R7RH86 MMBR571LT1
TH80
8R2RH81
1N
CH82
39pCH83
27pCH86
2R2RH82
2P
CH87
CL DATU IF1AGCINP 33VUB
LH30
LH81
LH84
LH20
LH22
LH83
LH82
LH42
LH43
Pr.
* DENOTES : NO COMPONENTS IN LAYOUT
*
*
AS
321 54 76 8 119
LOCK5V
LH09
LH10
LH49
LH48
LH47
LH41
LH40
LH39
LH38
LH37
LH36
LH35
LH34
LH33
LH32
LH31
LH12
LH11
LH08
LH07
LH06LH05LH04
LH03
LH02LH01
BIII=85BII =06BI =03BANDSWITCH
BI
BIII
BII
VHF / UHF TUNER CTT5010 ( For information only )
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
2,5
2,5
2,2
6,3
147
137
136
196
196
195,4
0,6 0,1
196
3,8Vpp-H1V 1V1,2V
3,8Vpp-H 3,5Vpp-H 120Vpp-H 150Vpp-H 150Vpp-H
47K0RB08
560K0RB07
560K0RB05
BF423TB01
BF422TB02
BB01
BV01
11234566
Rf
Rf
Rf
REFVIP
3
2
1
Ra
Ra
Ra
Ri
Ri
Ri
+
+
+
-
-
-
IB01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TDA6107Q CB09100P0
LB3110U0
RB71560R0
RB51560R0
RB011K5
RB31560R0
RB041K5
0
RB03
RB02560K0
CB0610U0
CB10NI
CB0110N0
CB04100N0 CB03
10U0
LB0668U0
LB5110U0
LB7110U0
LB02*
LB0110U0
DB50BAV21
DB51BAV21
DB70BAV21
DB71BAV21
DB30BAV21
DB31BAV21
DB041N4004GP
BB02BL02
1234567
1
7
CRT.17000.00
BB061
B
G
R
BB05 1 2
3
45
6
7
8
99 10
1112
BB041BB03 1
SK
FOCUS CRT GND
CRT GNDCHASSIS GND
CHASSISGND
CHASSIS GND
RB
G
HEAT_2HEAT_1
GND
GNDGND
GND
NC
I_CUT
U_VIDEO
* = see CT 170XX partslist
B
G
R G2G1
VH
G2
BG2
GG2
RG2
ICC17
ICC17
CRT
VIDEO AMPLIFIER BOARD - PLATINE AMPLIFICATEURS VIDEO - VIDEOVERSTÄRKERPLATTE - PIASTRA AMPLIFICATORE VIDEO - PLATINA AMPLIFICADOR VIDEO
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
M a n u e l
d’ u t i l i s a t i o n
B e d i e n u n g s -
a n l e i t u n g
M a n u a l e d i
u t i l i z z a z i o n e
U s e r
m a n u a l
δ η γ ι ε ς
ρ η σ ε ω ς
2 1 D U 2 1 C
2 1 M T 2 1 C
2 5 D G 2 1 C
2 8 D G 2 1 C
2 9 D L 2 1 C
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
LL33
LL13
LP93
LL31
LP84
LP80LP82
LP09
DH01
DP72
DP94
DL09
DP59
LL32
FI30
BP85
1
JX92
JX23
JX24
JS71JL74
LS10
LX18
DL12
DL32
DL33DL31
DP83
DL72
DL74
DV19
DH04
DR23
DR20
DR10
DL75
DP53
DP46
LL60
1
CR99
CS88
CL53
CS87
BR07
BR06
BX08
BR08
LL26
CV04
CL72
CL25
CV01
CP63CP26
RL57
RV20
RL18
RL37
RL34
RL65
RL59
RL75
RL16
RV31
RX23
RV30
RV14
RV17
RV16
RS80
RS79
RR70
RR72
RR74
RR76
RR78
RR58
RR50
RR51RR
71RR
73RR
75
RR77
RR82
RR45
RR04
RI65
RI50
RP80
RL01
RH04
RL43
RL07
RR57
RS61
RS60
RP76RP65 RP95 RP20
RP44
RP54RP52
RP39
RP19
BS80
1
RL36
RL11
RF08
RX17
RS87
RS12
RS88
RS20RC02
RV01
RP51
RP10
CF08
CP15
CV21
CS84
CL14
CL32
CP96
CP93
CL16
CS91
CS90
CP13
CP66
CS25
CL11
JF21
JF41JF40
JF17
JF30
JC84
JX82
JX60
JX07
JX79
JI04
JV03
JH01
JF24
JH03
JR03
JR04JR05
JL61
JP05
JS15
ZL14
ZL13
ZL11
1TL
51
CL24
CP03
CP04
JL92
JP06
TL02
EB
C
TL55
EB
C
RL44
RF05
RF04
RF07
DF01
RP63
TL34
EC
BTP50
EC
B
IP87
1
JF03
JH08
JF08JF18
JF22JF23
JH04
JI03
JS49
JX91
JX20
JS92
JX21
JR12JR11
JH02
JR15
JP03
JR10
TL33EBC IP95
CL21
TL14 B
CE
RL13
CL22
CL51
RV03
RP85
CL42
DP80
DP09
CP10
CP07
DP43
DP45
DP82
DL24 DL11
DL51 DL25
DP12
DP41
DP48DP47
LL22
DL22
DL13
DL14
DL21
DP02
DP04
DP03
DP01
CL08
RP03
RL60
LS25
TP21
BC
E
TL52
BC
E
TP44
BC
E
FI50
1
JI02
JF31
JF14
JF11
JR16JF07
JX90
JC81
JX88
JX85
JS72
JX61
JS79
JS90
JS09
JC01
JH07
JH05
JI10
JR13
JR06
JX93
JI05
BS91
1
BS90
1
TL41
E B
CP84
CS85CP82
CL13
RF09
RL25RL24
DP93 DP84
IX01
BP01
1
BL01
1
LR10
LR20
BX02
1
BX01
1
QC02
QR01
QC01
FI20
BX50
BL02
1
IS80
BX04 1
BV01
1
RP05
IF01
LH10 1
FI10
CP50
CP51
FI02
FI01
LP01
CP43
CP47
CP41
CP44
CF07
CF04CF10
CV26
CL48
CP22
CI50
CP11
CL60
RP02
RP49
JV90
JP07
JF06
JV04
JF10
JR02
JP08
JF19
JP01
JP02
JR01
JF12
JF26
JX80
JX83
JX94
JS75JS74
JS11
JS80
JS12
JX22
JS18JS21
JC02
JR09
JV05
JR07
JV02
JV01
JI01
JF25
JF36
JR08
TP14
EB
C
TL42EBC
TL32 E B C
TX15E B C
TX45
E B C
CP17
CP16
LS20
BS02
JL60
CP49
CP06
TP15
CP05
CP01
CP02
BP15 1RP
07
RP04
CH08
CP69
CV03
CS22
CC03
CS14
CL38
CH03
LP20
DS90
DP22
DP20
DP14
DP44
DL71
CP80
CF03
DP21
LP44
CP81
CP85CP94
CP83
CL15
CL55
CL12
CP42
CP20
DP18
DP16
DP50
DP19
DP17
DP87
RL10
RL26
QS40
CI63
CP54
CP52
CP58 CP24
CL37
CP97
CP98
CP87
CP72
CL09
CX62
CC01
CX59
CX15
CI54 CI57
CV08
CS43
CS46
CS18
CS17
CS67
CS66
CS65CS64
CS75
CS76 CS77CS78
CS35CS50
CS51
CS52
CS53
CR10
CP73
CS82
RP15
RP50
CP09 FP01
IP61
RP46
RL53
RP79
RL52
PP64
IS40
1
BF01
1
BR01
1
LV07LV06
LV05
NH01
CP08
LP06
IP50
1
LP50
RL35LL
05
E F G
4
3
2
1
0
DCBA E F G
4
3
2
1
0
DCBA H J
7
6
5
K L M
V
Z
J K L M
PNMLKJHGFEDCBA
9
8
7
6
5
T 2.5A L
10516550/A
GND-AV2
GND-AV2
MAIN BOARD - PLATINE PRINCIPALE - CHASSIS GRUNDPLATTE - PIASTRA PRINCIPALE - PLATINA PRINCIPAL COMPONENT SIDE - COTE COMPOSANTS - BESTÜCKUNGSSEITE - LATO COMPONENTI - LADO COMPONENTES
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
ICC17First issue 07 / 98
RL42
RL05
RL04
RF02
RF01
RF03
RF11
RF13
RL74
RF12
RL71
RL73
RL72
RL51
RL09
RL46 RL45
RL15
RP81
RP82
RL12
RL40
RR60
RR81
RR52
RR53
RR30
RR31
RR90 RR80
RR63
RR62 RR
66
RS83
RS05
RS01
RS03
RS02
RS04
RS42
RS43
RS40
RS29
RS27
RS93
RS85
RS77
RS78
RS76
RS75
RS64
RS65
RS66
RS67
RS62
RS63
RS50
RS51
RS52
RS53
RS41
RS95
RS92
RS96
RV18
RV12
RC05
RI61 RI63
RI64
RX08
RH20
RI33RI
31
RX39
RX19
RX28
RH03
RX57
RI07
RI42
RX47
RX56
RX59
RX05
RI51
RI04
RV10
RI03
RX06
RX07
RX25
RX24
RX22
RX09
RX58
RX27
RV05
RV06
RV07
RI60
RX14
RX43
RX02
RI16
RI15
RX03
RI32
RX01
RV25
RI66
RX13
RI41
RH05
RH10
RH02
RX18
RV13
RV08
RR48
RV15
RV09
RS84
RR15
RR68
RR69
RR49
RR12
RR17
RR01
RR02
RR03RR08
RR18
RR05
RR06
RR09
RR56
RR91
RR93
RR94
RR95
RR96
RR55
RR33 RR
32
RR44
RR43
RR42
RR41
RR40
RR46
RR47
RR16
RR14
RR21
RR22
RR20
RR64
RL70
RR87
RL03
RF06
RL06
RL19
RL41
RS86
RR10
RI59
RI58
RL76
RP93
RP91
RP90
RP89
RL58 RL56
RP77
RP87
RP84
RP86
RL31
RP71
RP73
RP97RP99
RP96
RP92
RP70
RP74
RP72
RP75
RP94
RL47
RL48
RL49
RL33 RL32
RL54
RL55
RL02
RS97
RS54
RB10
RS55
RS98
RL39
RR86
RL77
RS99
RP88
RP64
RP69
RP68
RP61
RP62
RP66
RP60
RP83
RP98
RP09
RP78
RP08
RP13
RP18 RP17 RP16 RP06 RP01
RP35RP38
RP21
RP22
RP14
RP27
RP26
RP30
RP24RP25
RP11
RP12
RP55
RP48
RP53
RP47
RP57
RP56
RP43
RP42 RP
31RP45
RP40
RP23
RP58
RP41
RP59
RS90
RS91
RP28
LR30LR31
LI50
CP23
CL31
CL36
CP95
CP92
CF01CF02
CF11
CF12
CL41
CC04
CX61
CI58
CH02
CH05
CH06
CI43
CI09
CI72 CI60
CX01
CX03
CX02
CV25
CX60
CI61
CC11
CV15CV17
CV16
CV20CV22
CV23 CV24
CV05
CV06
CV07
CV31
CV30
CV27
CS40
CS32
CS23
CS31
CS15
CS55
CS54
CS56
CS57
CS60
CS61
CS62
CS63
CS68 CS69
CS70
CS71
CS73
CS92
CS93
CS80CS
26
CS79
CS27
CS74
CS36
CS39
CS16
CS41
CS94CS95
CS24
CS02CS01
CS34
CS33
CV18
CV14
CV13
CV09
CI45
CI12
CR94
CS13
CS12
CS11
CS10
CI47
CL33
CL35
CL34
CS59
CP86
CL71
CL39
CP61
CP59
CP57
CP12
CL52
DP57
DL77
DR21
DS41
DP24
DP40
DP60
DP58
DP61
JS01
JL80
JL81
JL82
JS99
JI50
JP51
JP14
JP15
TL59
TP86
TL31
TP76
TP71
TP90
TP72
TP82
TR15
TL71
TF01
TI45
TV10
TR60
TS01
TI60
TI10
TI30
TS81
TR20
TP75
TR13
TR40
TR23
TL72
TP42
TP59
TP57
TP58
TP67
LI10
LR34
LR02
IV01
IR03
1
IR02
1
RV19
JR51
JR52
DP52
DP54
DP42
DP56
DP66
DP63
DP62
DP67
DL19
DP85
DP70
DP89
DL73
DS40
DV09
DR05
DR24
DL48
DX62
DX59
DR22
CP89
CC10CI
51
CR91
CL59
CP56
CP38
CS05
CS06
CS07
CS08
CS09
CR23
CR21
CR80
CS47
CR20
CR30
CR90
CR98
CR05
CR03
CR22
CR97
CR01
CR09
CR08
CR06
CR11
CR07
CR12
CR04
CI53
CH01
CR33
CI59
CI56
CI04
CX17
CX47
CX18
CC02
CR32
CH20
CI15
CI16
CV12
CV11
CV10
CV02
CC05
CC07CC06
CI05
CI03
CI02
CI55
CS42
CR15
CS81
CI10
CR92
CR41
CR93
CR95
CR96
CS04
CX58 CX19
CR24
DI40
DI30
IP20
1
JP47
JP46
JX51
JP71
JP70
JL72
JS98
JF51
JF50
JF52
JF55
JH06
JX57
JF54
JR58
JR59
JS53
JS50
JS42
JS51
JS40
JV52
JH54
JS54
JX43
JX44JV55
JV54
JV53
JC52
JI54
JI51
JR63JR
62
JI58
JI53
JI52
JF56
JH51
JX29
JS69
JX52
JX53
JX54
JS52
JS58
JS70
JS62
JS59
JS56 JS66JS65
JS55
JX42
JI57
JR54
JR53
JS61
JL71
JR66
JR65
JX58
JR64
JS43
JS57
JV56
JS44JF
49
JF53
JP44
JP45
DL42
DX01
IR01
LS40
LS41
LX62
LX59
LS63
LS61
LS62 LS
60
GFEDCBA
1
2
3
4
0
GFDBA
1
2
3
4
0
7
J
5
6
H MLK
V
Z
8
7
J
A B C D E F G J K L MN
P
MLK
5
6
9
H
H
1051
6550
.0A
DP16DP17
DP19
5
TP14
3
12
DP09DP50
E
C
B
TP50
RP15
BP15
LP01 BP01
FP01
DP18
TP21
DP01
DP03
DP04
DP02
CP10
TP44
TP15
21 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
IP61
TL42
2
5
CAD-
REF:
DST5V
LP503 5 6
7
8 9
U-
7 1
1
TimerU UP
8V
SYS
U-Video
+UA
-UA
1
32
TL02 TL55
TL52
IP87
BL01
TL33
3 1
6 4LL32
IP95BL02
TL32
HOR
LP504 8 9
80 1
16
17 32
1BR
01
BX01
31 5
20
21
2
211713931
BX02TX15
IX0110 1
6 1
1
BX04
1
1
1
BS91 BS90
BS80
1
6 BV01
64
1
4 BX50
33
32
64
1IS40
TX45
BE
ON+5V
+5V
9 IF01
BF01
BL01
3 1
6 4LL32
LL26
B
C
E
TL34
DL21
DL22
GAK
TL51
LL22
C
TL41
DL14
DL13
TL14
HOR
VERT
1
LL05
10
9
87
6 54
3
2
1
SOLDER SIDE - CÔTE SOUDURES - LÖTSEITE - LATO SALDATURE - LADO SOLDADURAS
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
1
About this manual
This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased
About the switch
The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).
About safety
To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.
TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.
About cleaning
The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.
About degaussing
The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Contents
2
Page 4
Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.
Page
How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.
5
Inst
alla
tio
n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the Installation main menu 5. . .
Calling up the Settings summary 5. . . . . . .
Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing your television for thefirst time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst
ruct
ion
sfo
rU
se
Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .
Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .
Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
$
ContinentalEurope
United Kingdom
The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.
Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.
2
Basic connections
3
Basic connections
The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.
The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.
If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.
The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.
The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).
We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.
When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
This key is active only when usingthe Teletext (blue key)
Display of channel, time, sound (yellowbutton) (and zoom for models with zoom)
The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.
Standby
Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)
Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)
Go to adjustment function MENU
Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus
Move Up/Down in menus
Change programme
Volume adjustment
To leave a menu or Teletext
Sound mute
Call up programme list(green button)
Selecting appliancesconnected to the television
(AV1, AV2 ...)
Confirm an action or validate amenu option
Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)
For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.
8
Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.
Remote control
4
Remote control
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SUMMARY
Exit
Teletext
Picture
Sound
List
Time
Preferences
Navigation principles
5
Navigation principles
Calling up the Installation main menu
If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.
Calling up the Settings summary
Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television
Calling up a Menu
Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..
Navigating within the Menus
Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.
Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:
- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning
- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial
Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:
for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:
for example: Picture preferences
You can use the 3 key to:
- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder
- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences
- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number
Use the 4 key to exit a menu.
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch
(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)
(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION
ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway
Other
Select your country and press OK
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
(Fig. 3)
Installing your television for the first time
6
Installing your television for the first time
First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.
Installation Instructions (start)
1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.
2. Then validate using .
3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.
4. Then validate using .
5. A welcome message is displayed.
6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .
7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.
8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the
/ keys.
If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.
Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.
*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.
Installation Instructions (end)
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
Automatic installation
7
Automatic installation
The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.
Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.
Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.
1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).
2. Select the Auto installation line.
3. Validate using .
A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.
If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
PROGRAMME ORGANISATION
Return
Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.
13- -EURO13
10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD
Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Programme organisation
8
Programme organisation
During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.
If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .
- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list
your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,
select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.
5. .Validate using .
- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and
the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..
3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap
position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.
6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.
- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using
the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you
require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.
If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.
When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previous
Manual programming
9
Manual programming
The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.
1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.
3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at
the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.
Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.
The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.
France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and
the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and
IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe
Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.
Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.
Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.
Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
Personal settings
10
Personal settings
1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Personal settings.
3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the
bottom of the screen.
For further details, read the information below.
Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.
Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.
For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.
Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.
Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.
On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).
AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.
Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.
Exit the menu using .
13:15
PERSONAL SETTINGS
Return
Menu language
Country
Auto volume level
AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name
Prog. to be usedfor reference time
Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.
English
UK
VCR- - - -CAMC
06
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PREFERENCESReturn
Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences
VideoS-VideoAuto
PICTURE PREFERENCES
Return
SettingsBrightnessColourContrast
Personal
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Preferences
11
Preferences
1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .
2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .
Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.
Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.
AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).
AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).
Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:
Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.
If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.
Picture preferences :
To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .
If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.
Settings :Select Standard or Personal.
Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.
The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.
Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.
Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PICTURE
Return
BrightnessColourContrastSharpness
Contrast expandTone
NeutralCold
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
SOUND
Return
Sound typeSound mode
Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect
AutomaticNormal
Broadcastmonostereodual
NICAM-3AV
Choiceautomatic - mono
mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2
sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2
Mode Effect
Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).
Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and
adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.
Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.
Daily viewing
12
Daily viewing
Picture Adjustment
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .
Sound Settings
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.
Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.
The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.
Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :
This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.
Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
TIMEReturn
Sleep timer
Current time
Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
00 : 00
11 : 28
07 : 0701 BBC1
Daily viewing
13
Time
You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.
Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.
One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.
Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.
Wake-up timer :
If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).
Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.
The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.
Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.
Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.
Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.
Exit the menu using .
Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
LIST
Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO
Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9
Daily viewing
14
List of Channels
This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.
To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .
The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.
If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.
Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Daily viewing
15
Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.
If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.
Scrolling the Programmes
You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes
Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.
Volume Control
Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.
Muting the Sound
Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.
Zoom(16/9 models only)
This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:
ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.
Displaying Information
Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.
Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.
The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.
When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.
Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Teletext
16
Teletext
Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).
Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).
A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.
Standard Functions
Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.
Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.
Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.
Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.
Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.
Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.
Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .
Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.
Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.
Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.
Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.
To exit Teletext, press or .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
* on models equipped with this function
* on models equipped with this function
Other Connections
17
Other Connections
The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.
The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.
To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is
selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.
The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.
Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.
Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).
PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket
CALLPROGRAMME
VCRPeripheral
AV1
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV1
CamcorderCinches or
S-VideoAV3
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV3
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
MANUEL D’UTILISATION - BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG - MANUALE DI UTILIZZAZIONE - USER MANUAL
MANUAL DE UTILIZACIÓN - GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING - BRUKSANGVISNING
%(7-(1,1*69(-/('1,1* - FOLHETO DE UTILIZAÇÃO
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
1
About this manual
This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased
About the switch
The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).
About safety
To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.
TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.
About cleaning
The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.
About degaussing
The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Contents
2
Page 4
Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.
Page
How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.
5
Inst
alla
tio
n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the Installation main menu 5. . .
Calling up the Settings summary 5. . . . . . .
Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing your television for thefirst time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst
ruct
ion
sfo
rU
se
Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .
Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .
Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
$
ContinentalEurope
United Kingdom
The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.
Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.
2
Basic connections
3
Basic connections
The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.
The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.
If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.
The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.
The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).
We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.
When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
This key is active only when usingthe Teletext (blue key)
Display of channel, time, sound (yellowbutton) (and zoom for models with zoom)
The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.
Standby
Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)
Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)
Go to adjustment function MENU
Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus
Move Up/Down in menus
Change programme
Volume adjustment
To leave a menu or Teletext
Sound mute
Call up programme list(green button)
Selecting appliancesconnected to the television
(AV1, AV2 ...)
Confirm an action or validate amenu option
Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)
For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.
8
Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.
Remote control
4
Remote control
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SUMMARY
Exit
Teletext
Picture
Sound
List
Time
Preferences
Navigation principles
5
Navigation principles
Calling up the Installation main menu
If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.
Calling up the Settings summary
Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television
Calling up a Menu
Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..
Navigating within the Menus
Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.
Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:
- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning
- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial
Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:
for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:
for example: Picture preferences
You can use the 3 key to:
- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder
- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences
- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number
Use the 4 key to exit a menu.
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch
(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)
(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION
ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway
Other
Select your country and press OK
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
(Fig. 3)
Installing your television for the first time
6
Installing your television for the first time
First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.
Installation Instructions (start)
1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.
2. Then validate using .
3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.
4. Then validate using .
5. A welcome message is displayed.
6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .
7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.
8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the
/ keys.
If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.
Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.
*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.
Installation Instructions (end)
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
Automatic installation
7
Automatic installation
The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.
Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.
Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.
1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).
2. Select the Auto installation line.
3. Validate using .
A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.
If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
PROGRAMME ORGANISATION
Return
Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.
13- -EURO13
10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD
Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Programme organisation
8
Programme organisation
During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.
If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .
- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list
your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,
select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.
5. .Validate using .
- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and
the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..
3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap
position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.
6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.
- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using
the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you
require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.
If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.
When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previous
Manual programming
9
Manual programming
The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.
1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.
3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at
the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.
Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.
The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.
France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and
the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and
IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe
Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.
Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.
Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.
Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
Personal settings
10
Personal settings
1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Personal settings.
3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the
bottom of the screen.
For further details, read the information below.
Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.
Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.
For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.
Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.
Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.
On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).
AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.
Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.
Exit the menu using .
13:15
PERSONAL SETTINGS
Return
Menu language
Country
Auto volume level
AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name
Prog. to be usedfor reference time
Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.
English
UK
VCR- - - -CAMC
06
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PREFERENCESReturn
Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences
VideoS-VideoAuto
PICTURE PREFERENCES
Return
SettingsBrightnessColourContrast
Personal
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Preferences
11
Preferences
1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .
2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .
Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.
Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.
AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).
AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).
Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:
Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.
If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.
Picture preferences :
To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .
If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.
Settings :Select Standard or Personal.
Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.
The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.
Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.
Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PICTURE
Return
BrightnessColourContrastSharpness
Contrast expandTone
NeutralCold
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
SOUND
Return
Sound typeSound mode
Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect
AutomaticNormal
Broadcastmonostereodual
NICAM-3AV
Choiceautomatic - mono
mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2
sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2
Mode Effect
Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).
Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and
adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.
Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.
Daily viewing
12
Daily viewing
Picture Adjustment
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .
Sound Settings
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.
Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.
The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.
Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :
This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.
Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
TIMEReturn
Sleep timer
Current time
Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
00 : 00
11 : 28
07 : 0701 BBC1
Daily viewing
13
Time
You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.
Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.
One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.
Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.
Wake-up timer :
If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).
Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.
The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.
Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.
Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.
Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.
Exit the menu using .
Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
LIST
Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO
Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9
Daily viewing
14
List of Channels
This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.
To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .
The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.
If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.
Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Daily viewing
15
Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.
If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.
Scrolling the Programmes
You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes
Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.
Volume Control
Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.
Muting the Sound
Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.
Zoom(16/9 models only)
This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:
ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.
Displaying Information
Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.
Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.
The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.
When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.
Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Teletext
16
Teletext
Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).
Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).
A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.
Standard Functions
Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.
Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.
Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.
Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.
Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.
Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.
Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .
Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.
Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.
Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.
Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.
To exit Teletext, press or .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
* on models equipped with this function
* on models equipped with this function
Other Connections
17
Other Connections
The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.
The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.
To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is
selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.
The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.
Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.
Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).
PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket
CALLPROGRAMME
VCRPeripheral
AV1
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV1
CamcorderCinches or
S-VideoAV3
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV3
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
1
About this manual
This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased
About the switch
The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).
About safety
To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.
TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.
About cleaning
The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.
About degaussing
The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Contents
2
Page 4
Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.
Page
How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.
5
Inst
alla
tio
n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the Installation main menu 5. . .
Calling up the Settings summary 5. . . . . . .
Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing your television for thefirst time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst
ruct
ion
sfo
rU
se
Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .
Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .
Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
$
ContinentalEurope
United Kingdom
The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.
Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.
2
Basic connections
3
Basic connections
The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.
The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.
If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.
The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.
The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).
We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.
When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
This key is active only when usingthe Teletext (blue key)
Display of channel, time, sound (yellowbutton) (and zoom for models with zoom)
The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.
Standby
Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)
Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)
Go to adjustment function MENU
Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus
Move Up/Down in menus
Change programme
Volume adjustment
To leave a menu or Teletext
Sound mute
Call up programme list(green button)
Selecting appliancesconnected to the television
(AV1, AV2 ...)
Confirm an action or validate amenu option
Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)
For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.
8
Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.
Remote control
4
Remote control
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SUMMARY
Exit
Teletext
Picture
Sound
List
Time
Preferences
Navigation principles
5
Navigation principles
Calling up the Installation main menu
If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.
Calling up the Settings summary
Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television
Calling up a Menu
Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..
Navigating within the Menus
Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.
Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:
- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning
- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial
Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:
for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:
for example: Picture preferences
You can use the 3 key to:
- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder
- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences
- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number
Use the 4 key to exit a menu.
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch
(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)
(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION
ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway
Other
Select your country and press OK
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
(Fig. 3)
Installing your television for the first time
6
Installing your television for the first time
First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.
Installation Instructions (start)
1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.
2. Then validate using .
3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.
4. Then validate using .
5. A welcome message is displayed.
6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .
7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.
8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the
/ keys.
If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.
Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.
*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.
Installation Instructions (end)
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
Automatic installation
7
Automatic installation
The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.
Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.
Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.
1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).
2. Select the Auto installation line.
3. Validate using .
A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.
If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
PROGRAMME ORGANISATION
Return
Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.
13- -EURO13
10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD
Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Programme organisation
8
Programme organisation
During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.
If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .
- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list
your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,
select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.
5. .Validate using .
- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and
the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..
3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap
position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.
6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.
- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using
the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you
require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.
If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.
When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previous
Manual programming
9
Manual programming
The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.
1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.
3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at
the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.
Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.
The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.
France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and
the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and
IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe
Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.
Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.
Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.
Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
Personal settings
10
Personal settings
1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Personal settings.
3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the
bottom of the screen.
For further details, read the information below.
Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.
Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.
For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.
Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.
Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.
On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).
AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.
Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.
Exit the menu using .
13:15
PERSONAL SETTINGS
Return
Menu language
Country
Auto volume level
AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name
Prog. to be usedfor reference time
Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.
English
UK
VCR- - - -CAMC
06
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PREFERENCESReturn
Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences
VideoS-VideoAuto
PICTURE PREFERENCES
Return
SettingsBrightnessColourContrast
Personal
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Preferences
11
Preferences
1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .
2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .
Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.
Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.
AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).
AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).
Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:
Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.
If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.
Picture preferences :
To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .
If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.
Settings :Select Standard or Personal.
Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.
The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.
Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.
Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PICTURE
Return
BrightnessColourContrastSharpness
Contrast expandTone
NeutralCold
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
SOUND
Return
Sound typeSound mode
Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect
AutomaticNormal
Broadcastmonostereodual
NICAM-3AV
Choiceautomatic - mono
mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2
sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2
Mode Effect
Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).
Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and
adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.
Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.
Daily viewing
12
Daily viewing
Picture Adjustment
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .
Sound Settings
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.
Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.
The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.
Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :
This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.
Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
TIMEReturn
Sleep timer
Current time
Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
00 : 00
11 : 28
07 : 0701 BBC1
Daily viewing
13
Time
You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.
Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.
One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.
Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.
Wake-up timer :
If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).
Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.
The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.
Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.
Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.
Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.
Exit the menu using .
Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
LIST
Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO
Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9
Daily viewing
14
List of Channels
This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.
To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .
The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.
If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.
Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Daily viewing
15
Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.
If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.
Scrolling the Programmes
You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes
Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.
Volume Control
Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.
Muting the Sound
Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.
Zoom(16/9 models only)
This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:
ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.
Displaying Information
Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.
Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.
The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.
When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.
Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Teletext
16
Teletext
Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).
Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).
A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.
Standard Functions
Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.
Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.
Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.
Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.
Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.
Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.
Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .
Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.
Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.
Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.
Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.
To exit Teletext, press or .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
* on models equipped with this function
* on models equipped with this function
Other Connections
17
Other Connections
The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.
The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.
To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is
selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.
The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.
Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.
Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).
PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket
CALLPROGRAMME
VCRPeripheral
AV1
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV1
CamcorderCinches or
S-VideoAV3
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV3
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
M a n u e l
d’ u t i l i s a t i o n
B e d i e n u n g s -
a n l e i t u n g
M a n u a l e d i
u t i l i z z a z i o n e
U s e r
m a n u a l
M a n u a l d e
u t i l i z a c i ó n
G e b r u i k s -
a a n w i j z i n g
B r u k s a n -
v i s n i n g
B e t j e n i n g s -
v e j l e d n i n g
F o l h e t o d e
u t i l i z a ç ã o
2 1 D U 2 1 E 2 1 D U 2 3 E2 1 M T 2 1 E 2 4 W K 2 1 E2 5 D G 2 1 E 2 5 D H 2 1 E2 5 D T 2 1 E 2 5 D U 2 1 E2 5 D U 2 3 E 2 5 M H 2 1 E2 8 D G 2 1 E 2 8 D T 2 1 E2 8 W S 2 1 E 2 9 D H 2 1 E2 9 D L 2 1 E 2 9 D U 2 1 E2 9 M H 2 1 E 3 3 M S 2 1 E
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
1
About this manual
This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased
About the switch
The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).
About safety
To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.
TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.
About cleaning
The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.
About degaussing
The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Contents
2
Page 4
Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.
Page
How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.
5
Inst
alla
tio
n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the Installation main menu 5. . .
Calling up the Settings summary 5. . . . . . .
Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing your television for thefirst time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst
ruct
ion
sfo
rU
se
Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .
Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .
Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
$
ContinentalEurope
United Kingdom
The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.
Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.
2
Basic connections
3
Basic connections
The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.
The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.
If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.
The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.
The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).
We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.
When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
This key is active only when usingthe Teletext (blue key)
Display of channel, time, sound (yellowbutton) (and zoom for models with zoom)
The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.
Standby
Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)
Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)
Go to adjustment function MENU
Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus
Move Up/Down in menus
Change programme
Volume adjustment
To leave a menu or Teletext
Sound mute
Call up programme list(green button)
Selecting appliancesconnected to the television
(AV1, AV2 ...)
Confirm an action or validate amenu option
Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)
For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.
8
Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.
Remote control
4
Remote control
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SUMMARY
Exit
Teletext
Picture
Sound
List
Time
Preferences
Navigation principles
5
Navigation principles
Calling up the Installation main menu
If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.
Calling up the Settings summary
Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television
Calling up a Menu
Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..
Navigating within the Menus
Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.
Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:
- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning
- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial
Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:
for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:
for example: Picture preferences
You can use the 3 key to:
- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder
- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences
- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number
Use the 4 key to exit a menu.
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch
(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)
(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION
ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway
Other
Select your country and press OK
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
(Fig. 3)
Installing your television for the first time
6
Installing your television for the first time
First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.
Installation Instructions (start)
1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.
2. Then validate using .
3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.
4. Then validate using .
5. A welcome message is displayed.
6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .
7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.
8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the
/ keys.
If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.
Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.
*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.
Installation Instructions (end)
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
Automatic installation
7
Automatic installation
The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.
Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.
Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.
1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).
2. Select the Auto installation line.
3. Validate using .
A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.
If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
PROGRAMME ORGANISATION
Return
Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.
13- -EURO13
10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD
Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Programme organisation
8
Programme organisation
During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.
If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .
- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list
your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,
select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.
5. .Validate using .
- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and
the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..
3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap
position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.
6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.
- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using
the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you
require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.
If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.
When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previous
Manual programming
9
Manual programming
The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.
1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.
3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at
the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.
Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.
The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.
France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and
the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and
IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe
Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.
Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.
Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.
Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
Personal settings
10
Personal settings
1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Personal settings.
3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the
bottom of the screen.
For further details, read the information below.
Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.
Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.
For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.
Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.
Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.
On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).
AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.
Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.
Exit the menu using .
13:15
PERSONAL SETTINGS
Return
Menu language
Country
Auto volume level
AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name
Prog. to be usedfor reference time
Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.
English
UK
VCR- - - -CAMC
06
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PREFERENCESReturn
Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences
VideoS-VideoAuto
PICTURE PREFERENCES
Return
SettingsBrightnessColourContrast
Personal
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Preferences
11
Preferences
1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .
2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .
Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.
Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.
AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).
AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).
Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:
Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.
If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.
Picture preferences :
To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .
If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.
Settings :Select Standard or Personal.
Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.
The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.
Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.
Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PICTURE
Return
BrightnessColourContrastSharpness
Contrast expandTone
NeutralCold
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
SOUND
Return
Sound typeSound mode
Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect
AutomaticNormal
Broadcastmonostereodual
NICAM-3AV
Choiceautomatic - mono
mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2
sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2
Mode Effect
Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).
Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and
adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.
Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.
Daily viewing
12
Daily viewing
Picture Adjustment
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .
Sound Settings
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.
Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.
The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.
Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :
This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.
Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
TIMEReturn
Sleep timer
Current time
Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
00 : 00
11 : 28
07 : 0701 BBC1
Daily viewing
13
Time
You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.
Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.
One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.
Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.
Wake-up timer :
If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).
Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.
The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.
Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.
Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.
Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.
Exit the menu using .
Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
LIST
Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO
Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9
Daily viewing
14
List of Channels
This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.
To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .
The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.
If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.
Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Daily viewing
15
Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.
If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.
Scrolling the Programmes
You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes
Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.
Volume Control
Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.
Muting the Sound
Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.
Zoom(16/9 models only)
This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:
ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.
Displaying Information
Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.
Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.
The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.
When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.
Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Teletext
16
Teletext
Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).
Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).
A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.
Standard Functions
Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.
Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.
Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.
Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.
Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.
Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.
Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .
Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.
Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.
Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.
Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.
To exit Teletext, press or .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
* on models equipped with this function
* on models equipped with this function
Other Connections
17
Other Connections
The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.
The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.
To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is
selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.
The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.
Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.
Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).
PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket
CALLPROGRAMME
VCRPeripheral
AV1
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV1
CamcorderCinches or
S-VideoAV3
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV3
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
B e d i e n u n g s -
a n l e i t u n g ·
M a n u a l e d i
u t i l i z z a z i o n e ·
U
m a n u a l ·
DF321C / DF421C / MF221C
δ η γ ι ε ς
ρ η σ ε ω ς ·
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
1
About this manual
This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased
About the switch
The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).
About safety
To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.
TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.
About cleaning
The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.
About degaussing
The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Contents
2
Page 4
Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.
Page
How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.
5
Inst
alla
tio
n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the SUMMARY 5. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing your television forthe first time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst
ruct
ion
sfo
rU
se
Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .
Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .
Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .C
17/
BA
SIC
/40
00/
GB
-TB
A/
I6.3
/B
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
$
ContinentalEurope
United Kingdom
The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.
Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.
2
Basic connections
3
Basic connections
The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.
The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.
If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.
The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.
The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).
We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.
When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
This key is active only whenusing the Teletext (blue key)
Confirm an action or validatea menu option
Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)
Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)
Go to adjustment function MENUVolume adjustment
Standby
Illumination of remote controlbuttons
Sound mute
Change programme
Move Up/Down in menus
Call up programme list(green button)
Selecting appliancesconnected to the television
(AV1, AV2 ...)
Display of channel, time, sound(yellow button) (and zoom for models
with zoom)
Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)
To leave a menu or Teletext
Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus
For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.
The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.
Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.
Remote control
Remote control
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SUMMARY
Exit
Teletext
Picture
Sound
List
Time
Preferences
Navigation principles
5
Navigation principles
Calling up the Installation main menu
If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.
Calling up the Settings summary
Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television
Calling up a Menu
Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..
Navigating within the Menus
Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.
Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:
- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning
- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial
Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:
for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:
for example: Picture preferences
You can use the 3 key to:
- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder
- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences
- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number
Use the 4 key to exit a menu.
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch
(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)
(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION
ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway
Other
Select your country and press OK
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
(Fig. 3)
Installing your television for the first time
6
Installing your television for the first time
First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.
Installation Instructions (start)
1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.
2. Then validate using .
3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.
4. Then validate using .
5. A welcome message is displayed.
6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .
7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.
8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the
/ keys.
If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.
Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.
*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.
Installation Instructions (end)
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
Automatic installation
7
Automatic installation
The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.
Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.
Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.
1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).
2. Select the Auto installation line.
3. Validate using .
A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.
If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
PROGRAMME ORGANISATION
Return
Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.
13- -EURO13
10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD
Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Programme organisation
8
Programme organisation
During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.
If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .
- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list
your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,
select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.
5. .Validate using .
- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and
the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..
3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap
position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.
6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.
- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using
the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you
require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.
If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.
When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previous
Manual programming
9
Manual programming
The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.
1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.
3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at
the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.
Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.
The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.
France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and
the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and
IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe
Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.
Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.
Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.
Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
Personal settings
10
Personal settings
1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Personal settings.
3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the
bottom of the screen.
For further details, read the information below.
Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.
Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.
For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.
Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.
Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.
On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).
AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.
Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.
Exit the menu using .
13:15
PERSONAL SETTINGS
Return
Menu language
Country
Auto volume level
AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name
Prog. to be usedfor reference time
Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.
English
UK
VCR- - - -CAMC
06
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PREFERENCESReturn
Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences
VideoS-VideoAuto
PICTURE PREFERENCES
Return
SettingsBrightnessColourContrast
Personal
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Preferences
11
Preferences
1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .
2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .
Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.
Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.
AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).
AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).
Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:
Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.
If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.
Picture preferences :
To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .
If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.
Settings :Select Standard or Personal.
Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.
The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.
Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.
Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PICTURE
Return
BrightnessColourContrastSharpness
Contrast expandTone
NeutralCold
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
SOUND
Return
Sound typeSound mode
Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect
AutomaticNormal
Broadcastmonostereodual
NICAM-3AV
Choiceautomatic - mono
mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2
sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2
Mode Effect
Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).
Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and
adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.
Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.
Daily viewing
12
Daily viewing
Picture Adjustment
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .
Sound Settings
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.
Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.
The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.
Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :
This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.
Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
TIMEReturn
Sleep timer
Current time
Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
00 : 00
11 : 28
07 : 0701 BBC1
Daily viewing
13
Time
You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.
Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.
One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.
Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.
Wake-up timer :
If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).
Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.
The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.
Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.
Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.
Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.
Exit the menu using .
Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
LIST
Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO
Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9
Daily viewing
14
List of Channels
This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.
To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .
The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.
If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.
Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Daily viewing
15
Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.
If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.
Scrolling the Programmes
You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes
Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.
Volume Control
Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.
Muting the Sound
Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.
Zoom(16/9 models only)
This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:
ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.
Displaying Information
Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.
Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.
The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.
When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.
Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Teletext
16
Teletext
Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).
Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).
A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.
Standard Functions
Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.
Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.
Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.
Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.
Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.
Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.
Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .
Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.
Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.
Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.
Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.
To exit Teletext, press or .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
* on models equipped with this function
* on models equipped with this function
Other Connections
17
Other Connections
The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.
The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.
To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is
selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.
The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.
Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.
Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).
PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket
CALLPROGRAMME
VCRPeripheral
AV1
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV1
CamcorderCinches or
S-VideoAV3
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV3
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
M a n u e l
d’ u t i l i s a t i o n ·B e d i e n u n g s -
a n l e i t u n g ·M a n u a l e d i
u t i l i z z a z i o n e ·U s e r
m a n u a l ·
M a n u a l d e
u t i l i z a c i ó n ·G e b r u i k s -
a a n w i j z i n g ·B r u k s a n -
v i s n i n g ·B e t j e n i n g s -
v e j l e d n i n g ·
DF321E / DF421E
F o l h e t o d e
u t i l i z a ç ã o ·www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
1
About this manual
This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased
About the switch
The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).
About safety
To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.
TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.
About cleaning
The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.
About degaussing
The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Contents
2
Page 4
Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.
Page
How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.
5
Inst
alla
tio
n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the Installation main menu 5. . .
Calling up the Settings summary 5. . . . . . .
Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing your television for thefirst time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst
ruct
ion
sfo
rU
se
Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .
Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .
Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
$
ContinentalEurope
United Kingdom
The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.
Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.
2
Basic connections
3
Basic connections
The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.
The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.
If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.
The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.
The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).
We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.
When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
This key is active only when usingthe Teletext (blue key)
Display of channel, time, sound (yellowbutton) (and zoom for models with zoom)
The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.
Standby
Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)
Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)
Go to adjustment function MENU
Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus
Move Up/Down in menus
Change programme
Volume adjustment
To leave a menu or Teletext
Sound mute
Call up programme list(green button)
Selecting appliancesconnected to the television
(AV1, AV2 ...)
Confirm an action or validate amenu option
Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)
For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.
8
Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.
Remote control
4
Remote control
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SUMMARY
Exit
Teletext
Picture
Sound
List
Time
Preferences
Navigation principles
5
Navigation principles
Calling up the Installation main menu
If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.
Calling up the Settings summary
Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television
Calling up a Menu
Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..
Navigating within the Menus
Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.
Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:
- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning
- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial
Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:
for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:
for example: Picture preferences
You can use the 3 key to:
- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder
- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences
- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number
Use the 4 key to exit a menu.
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch
(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)
(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION
ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway
Other
Select your country and press OK
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
(Fig. 3)
Installing your television for the first time
6
Installing your television for the first time
First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.
Installation Instructions (start)
1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.
2. Then validate using .
3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.
4. Then validate using .
5. A welcome message is displayed.
6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .
7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.
8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the
/ keys.
If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.
Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.
*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.
Installation Instructions (end)
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
Automatic installation
7
Automatic installation
The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.
Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.
Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.
1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).
2. Select the Auto installation line.
3. Validate using .
A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.
If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
PROGRAMME ORGANISATION
Return
Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.
13- -EURO13
10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD
Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Programme organisation
8
Programme organisation
During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.
If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .
- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list
your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,
select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.
5. .Validate using .
- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and
the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..
3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap
position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.
6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.
- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using
the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you
require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.
If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.
When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previous
Manual programming
9
Manual programming
The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.
1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.
3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at
the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.
Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.
The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.
France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and
the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and
IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe
Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.
Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.
Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.
Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
Personal settings
10
Personal settings
1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Personal settings.
3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the
bottom of the screen.
For further details, read the information below.
Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.
Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.
For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.
Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.
Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.
On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).
AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.
Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.
Exit the menu using .
13:15
PERSONAL SETTINGS
Return
Menu language
Country
Auto volume level
AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name
Prog. to be usedfor reference time
Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.
English
UK
VCR- - - -CAMC
06
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PREFERENCESReturn
Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences
VideoS-VideoAuto
PICTURE PREFERENCES
Return
SettingsBrightnessColourContrast
Personal
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Preferences
11
Preferences
1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .
2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .
Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.
Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.
AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).
AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).
Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:
Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.
If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.
Picture preferences :
To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .
If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.
Settings :Select Standard or Personal.
Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.
The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.
Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.
Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PICTURE
Return
BrightnessColourContrastSharpness
Contrast expandTone
NeutralCold
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
SOUND
Return
Sound typeSound mode
Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect
AutomaticNormal
Broadcastmonostereodual
NICAM-3AV
Choiceautomatic - mono
mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2
sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2
Mode Effect
Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).
Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and
adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.
Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.
Daily viewing
12
Daily viewing
Picture Adjustment
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .
Sound Settings
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.
Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.
The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.
Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :
This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.
Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
TIMEReturn
Sleep timer
Current time
Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
00 : 00
11 : 28
07 : 0701 BBC1
Daily viewing
13
Time
You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.
Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.
One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.
Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.
Wake-up timer :
If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).
Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.
The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.
Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.
Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.
Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.
Exit the menu using .
Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
LIST
Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO
Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9
Daily viewing
14
List of Channels
This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.
To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .
The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.
If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.
Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Daily viewing
15
Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.
If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.
Scrolling the Programmes
You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes
Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.
Volume Control
Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.
Muting the Sound
Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.
Zoom(16/9 models only)
This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:
ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.
Displaying Information
Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.
Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.
The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.
When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.
Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Teletext
16
Teletext
Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).
Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).
A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.
Standard Functions
Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.
Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.
Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.
Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.
Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.
Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.
Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .
Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.
Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.
Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.
Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.
To exit Teletext, press or .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
* on models equipped with this function
* on models equipped with this function
Other Connections
17
Other Connections
The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.
The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.
To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is
selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.
The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.
Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.
Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).
PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket
CALLPROGRAMME
VCRPeripheral
AV1
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV1
CamcorderCinches or
S-VideoAV3
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV3
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
M a n u e l
d’ u t i l i s a t i o n
B e d i e n u n g s -
a n l e i t u n g
M a n u a l e d i
u t i l i z z a z i o n e
U s e r
m a n u a l
M a n u a l d e
u t i l i z a c i ó n
G e b r u i k s -
a a n w i j z i n g
B r u k s a n -
v i s n i n g
B e t j e n i n g s -
v e j l e d n i n g
F o l h e t o d e
u t i l i z a ç ã o
2 8 W S 2 3 E
3 2 W S 2 3 E
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
1
About this manual
This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply tothe model you have purchased
About the switch
The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on theright-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual).
About safety
To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructionsthoroughly.
TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do notblock the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure thereis enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater.The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptionalcircumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect itagainst moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait untilany condensation in the screen has dried by itself.Maximum ambient temperature: 35°CMaximum humidity: 85%By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off theTV set with the On/Off-switch.Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. Todisconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out.The mains plug must be easily accessible.In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector:1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket.2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set.Never attempt to open your TV set yourself.Further information:The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior.Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by amodel not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation.A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used.
About cleaning
The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners.: Never use abrasive products.: Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit oralcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television.: At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set.
About degaussing
The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the colouredspots, which appear on the screen.Should this be the case:: Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch.: Wait about one hour before switching the set on again.This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen,repeat the operation.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Contents
2
Page 4
Using the remote controland fitting the batteries.
Page
How to call up a menuand how to select afunction, a setting or anoption.
5
Inst
alla
tio
n About this manual 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the switch 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About safety 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About cleaning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About degaussing 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic connections 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation principles 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the SUMMARY 5. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up a Menu 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating within the Menus 5. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing your television forthe first time 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic installation 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programme organisation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual programming 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal settings 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst
ruct
ion
sfo
rU
se
Daily viewing 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture Adjustment 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Settings 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Channels 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling the Programmes 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes 15. . . . . .
Volume Control 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting the Sound 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom (16/9 models only) 15. . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Information 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Television Lock 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Off the Television 15. . . . . . . . .
Teletext 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Functions 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Connections 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Possibilities 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier 17. . . .C
17/
BA
SIC
/40
00/
GB
-TB
A/
I6.3
/B
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
$
ContinentalEurope
United Kingdom
The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects yourtelevision. If your television does not work, the fuse maybe blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 AmpASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse.
Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with amoulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment,so you are advised when replacing it not to use anon-specific commercially-available model.
2
Basic connections
3
Basic connections
The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. Thetelevision must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hzpower supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. Ifthe plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug itin: this could cause electrocution.
The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, canbe used to connect an external aerial or other applianceequipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver,etc.
If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must giveit a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, thenuse the television to find the modulator channel (see theappliance manual). Now give it a programme number andmemorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then,when you wish to use the appliance, simply select itsprogramme number on the television. This procedure is notrequired for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator.
The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console orRGB-signal emitting appliances.
The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of thetelevision, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder(VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8).
We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection,which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheralappliance that you have connected, press the AV key on yourremote control (press once to select AV1; twice to selectAV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). Thisselection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play”on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected toAV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television.
When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channelswhile watching the VCR, the television automaticallyswitches back to the channel you were watching beforehand.If the television has been switched on from the VCR, itswitches to standby when the VCR is switched off. Thetelevision automatically switches to 16/9 format if theconnected appliance delivers the corresponding signal.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
This key is active only whenusing the Teletext (blue key)
Confirm an action or validatea menu option
Right/Left Selection withinmenus andZoom Function (for models withthis function)
Call up Teletext / Toptext /Fastext function (purple button)
Go to adjustment function MENUVolume adjustment
Standby
Illumination of remote controlbuttons
Sound mute
Change programme
Move Up/Down in menus
Call up programme list(green button)
Selecting appliancesconnected to the television
(AV1, AV2 ...)
Display of channel, time, sound(yellow button) (and zoom for models
with zoom)
Reminder of picturepreferences (red button)
To leave a menu or Teletext
Go to programmes and enternumerical values in menus
For programme numbers higherthan 10, press the 0 key on theremote control: ”- -” appears onthe screen. Now use thenumber keys on the remotecontrol to enter first the tensdigit then the units digit.
The red, green, yellow andblue keys are also used forthe Teletext.
Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult yourdistributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling.
Remote control
Remote control
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SUMMARY
Exit
Teletext
Picture
Sound
List
Time
Preferences
Navigation principles
5
Navigation principles
Calling up the Installation main menu
If there is no menu displayed on the screen,press and hold the key on the remotecontrol. The settings SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU which you can use to operate yourtelevision.
Calling up the Settings summary
Press and release the key on theremote control to display the list of menusavailable for using your television functions oradjusting your television
Calling up a Menu
Select the menu you wish using the Up/Downkeys. Press the key to validate..
Navigating within the Menus
Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line.
Use the Left/Right keys 2 to:
- Increase or decrease a value:for example:Fine tuning
- Select an option:for example: Reception Aerial
Reception Cable- Activate or deactivate an option:
for example: Decoder- Access a sub-menu:
for example: Picture preferences
You can use the 3 key to:
- Activate or deactivate an option:for example: Decoder
- Access a sub-menu:for example: Picture preferences
- Validate an action:for example: Store on PR number
Use the 4 key to exit a menu.
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
EnglishFrançais OKDeutschItalianoEspañolPortuguêsNederlandsSvenskaDanskNorwisch
(Fig. 1)(Fig. 1)
(Fig. 2) COUNTRY SELECTION
ExitUnited KingdomEireFranceGermanyItalySpainPortugalHollandBelgium and LuxembourgSwitzerlandAustriaSwedenDenmarkNorway
Other
Select your country and press OK
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
(Fig. 3)
Installing your television for the first time
6
Installing your television for the first time
First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on usingthe ON/OFF switch located on the front or the side of your set.When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this doesnot happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the key on the television until this menu appears.
Installation Instructions (start)
1. Use the Up/Down keys to select thelanguage in which you wish the menus to bedisplayed.
2. Then validate using .
3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2).Select the country in which you live, or thecountry from which you wish to receive thebroadcasts if you live in a border area.
4. Then validate using .
5. A welcome message is displayed.
6. Run the automatic installation sequenceusing .
7. A message appears to inform you thatautomatic installation has started (Fig. 3).Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenautomatic installation is completed.
8. If you wish to check or modify the channelorganisation, press and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to modify the channelorganisation, you can exit the menu bypressing then watch the channel ofyour choice. Choose the desired channelusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the
/ keys.
If you have a decoder, see the Manualprogramming chapter.
Your television will only search for channelscorresponding to the country you haveselected. See the Manual channelprogramming chapter to install any channelsnot found.For cable networks, read the Automaticchannel installation chapter to install anychannels not found.
*The list of languages and countries may varyfrom one model to another.
Installation Instructions (end)
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
SEARCHING
AUTO INSTALLATION
003 STATIONS FOUND
Searching for TV stations.Please wait. To cancel press EXIT.
Automatic installation
7
Automatic installation
The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such aswhen moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, youshould use the Manual programming function.
Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the countrydisplayed is correct.
Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manualprogramming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certainchannels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automaticinstallation again.
1. Press and hold the key on the remotecontrol to display the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (The SUMMARY appears first,followed by the INSTALLATION MAINMENU).
2. Select the Auto installation line.
3. Validate using .
A message will inform you that Automaticinstallation has begun.Wait for a few minutes.A new message will inform you whenAutomatic installation is completed.
If you wish to check or reorganize your channeldisplay, press the key and see theProgramme organisation chapter.
If you do not wish to reorganize yourprogrammes, you can exit this menu bypressing , then watch the programme ofyour choice. Choose the desired programmeusing the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the/ keys.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
PROGRAMME ORGANISATION
Return
Select program.Swap with PR.Change pr. nameDelete program.
13- -EURO13
10 MTV11 FR212 TF113 EURO14 CH4015 CC0116 ARTE17 CART18 - - - -19 ARD
Select programme number usingPR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Programme organisation
8
Programme organisation
During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme numberaccording to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channelname not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which receptionis too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below.
If you wish to access thePROGRAMME ORGANISATION,menu thereafter, first press and holdthe key on the remote control todisplay the INSTALLATION MAINMENU (the SUMMARY is displayedfirst, followed by the INSTALLATIONMAIN MENU) then select Programmeorganisation and validate using .
- To delete a programme for which receptionis too poor:1. Select the line marked Select program.2. Use the / or Left/Right keys to list
your channels.3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete,
select the line marked Delete program.4. Press to delete the programme.
5. .Validate using .
- To organize your channels to suit you:1. Select the line marked Select program..2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and
the programmes logos to find the programmeto which you wish to give the No.1.Its present number appears on the linemarked Select program..
3. Select the line marked Swap with PR.4. Enter 01.5. Press . The two programmes swap
position and the desired programmebecomes N°1.
6. Repeat the above procedure for the otherchannels.
- To name your channels:1. Select the line marked Change pr. name2. Select the character you wish to modify using
the Left/Right keys.3. Use the and keys to display the letter you
require.The name you have entered will bememorised when you move to another line orexit the menu.
If you wish to change the order in whichyour programmes are displayed or ifyou wish to name other programmes,repeat the procedures describedabove.
When you have finished organizing theprogrammes, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
MANUAL PROGRAMMING
Return
StandardReceptionAutosearchFine tuningStore on PR numberNameDecoderExternal sound path
EURO BGCableCH- -
- -- - - -
Enter channel number or startautosearch with < or >.
Select the line marked Return to return to the previous
Manual programming
9
Manual programming
The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATICINSTALLATION.
1. Press and hold , the SUMMARY isdisplayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Manualprogramming.
3. Display the menu using .4. Now continue by following the messages at
the bottom of the screen. For further details,read the information below.
Standard :Select the standard using Left/Right keys thatcorresponds to your country from the list ofstandards.
The number of standards proposed will differfrom one model to another.
France for France and LuxemburgDKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and
the Middle-EastI for the United Kingdom and
IrelandEuro BG for Western Europe
Reception :Your television can pick up channels either viaan aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network.Certain cable networks use the samefrequencies as the RF channels. If this is thecase, you must select Aerial instead of Cable.Autosearch :Enter the programme number if you know it. Ifnot, search using the Left/Right keys. Yourtelevision will stop at the first channel it tunesinto. If you wish to memorize it, go to the linemarked Store on PR number. If not, resumethe search using the Left/Right keys.
Fine tuning :You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keysto obtain the best possible picture and sound.Store on PR number :Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using .Name :If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change theproposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using theLeft/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire.Decoder :Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack.External sound path :Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as requiredusing the Left/Right keys.
Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and pressto memorise these. Then move on to the next channel.
Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
INSTALLATION MAIN MENU
Exit
Manual programming
Auto installation
Programme organisation
Personal settings
Personal settings
10
Personal settings
1. Press and hold the key: theSUMMARY is displayed first, followed by theINSTALLATION MAIN MENU.
2. Select the line marked Personal settings.
3. Display the menu using .4. Continue by following the messages at the
bottom of the screen.
For further details, read the information below.
Menu language :Select the language in which the menus are tobe displayed.
Country :Indicate the country in which you are if you wishto rerun Automatic Programming.
For cable networks, if certain channelshave not been found, select Otherinstead of the country name before run-ning automatic installation again.You may find that the characters of cer-tain teletext languages are inaccess-ible for the selected country.
Auto volume level :This is a sound control function which aims toequalise the volume level between differentchannels, and between different programmeson the same channel.
Activate or deactivate the auto volume level asrequired.
On models equipped with Virtual DolbySurround, this function remainsinactive if Dolby Virtual has beenselected in the SOUND menu (seeVolume Control).
AV1, AV2, AV3 name :Use these to give a name to each of youraudio-visual programmes. Select the characteryou wish to modify using the Left/Right keys.Use the or keys to display the desiredcharacter.
Prog. to be used for reference time :To display the time using the key or to usethe alarm function, the television clock must beset to the correct time. Select the line markedProg. to be used for reference time and selecta channel which broadcasts teletext. The timeis set automatically and is displayed after thechannel number.
Exit the menu using .
13:15
PERSONAL SETTINGS
Return
Menu language
Country
Auto volume level
AV1 nameAV2 nameAV3 name
Prog. to be usedfor reference time
Select a station from which you wantto get the reference time.
English
UK
VCR- - - -CAMC
06
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PREFERENCESReturn
Show program. numberAV2 video inputAV3 video inputFormat controlPicture preferences
VideoS-VideoAuto
PICTURE PREFERENCES
Return
SettingsBrightnessColourContrast
Personal
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
Preferences
11
Preferences
1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing andreleasing the key on the remotecontrol .
2. Select the line marked Preferences.3. Display the menu using .
Make your choice from the proposedoptions. Use the information below to helpyou.
Show program. number :If you wish to permanently display the numberof the programme you are watching, tick the boxusing the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Rightkeys again to deactivate this function.
AV2 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video).
AV3 video input :Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are locatedon the front or the side of the television).
Format control :Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format:
Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks deliversthe switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format.16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format.4/3 : manually selects this picture format.
If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or youswitch off.
Picture preferences :
To access the PICTURE PREFERENCESmenu, press .
If you wish, you can personalize certainpicture settings. Select and set theproposed options. Use the informationbelow to help you.
Settings :Select Standard or Personal.
Standard corresponds to the factory settings.Personal corresponds to the settings that youhave entered yourself.
The lines Brightness, Colour andContrast are displayed only if you haveselected Personal on the Settings line.
Select each line one after the other and enteryour required settings. You can recall thesepicture settings by pressing the red key on theremote control.
Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
PICTURE
Return
BrightnessColourContrastSharpness
Contrast expandTone
NeutralCold
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
SOUND
Return
Sound typeSound mode
Balance L/RTrebleBassSurround effect
AutomaticNormal
Broadcastmonostereodual
NICAM-3AV
Choiceautomatic - mono
mono - stereosound 1 - sound 2
sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3stereo - sound 1 - sound 2
Mode Effect
Normal : reproduces the original sound (mono or stereo).
Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds.Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect.Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and
adds echo.Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround.
Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logicdecoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre andVirtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers.“”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of theDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.
Daily viewing
12
Daily viewing
Picture Adjustment
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select Picture. Validateusing . The PICTURE menu is displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness:Select each of these lines one after the other andset as required.Contrast expand :Select this line then choose the desired Contrastexpand setting (High or Low).Tone :Select this line then choose the desired colourtone (Warm, Neutral or Cold).Exit the menu using .
Sound Settings
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedSound. Validate using . The SOUND menuis displayed.
Select and set the proposed options. Usethe information below to help you.
Sound type :The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the broadcast.Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and thecorresponding choices are only availableon Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions.
Select this line, then select the type of sound youdesire.Sound mode :Select this line, then choose the desired modeusing the Left/Right keys.
The choices available to you depend onyour television model and the type ofsound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modesare only available in stereo on TV’sequipped with Virtual Dolby Surround.Stereo wide is only available on Stereo orNicam televisions not equipped withVirtual Dolby Surround.
Balance L/R :Select this line, then balance the sound betweenthe Left and Right loudspeakers.Treble, Bass :Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you.Surround effect :
This line appears only if you have selectedDolby Virtual on the Sound mode line.
Select this line and adjust the surround effect tosuit you.Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
TIMEReturn
Sleep timer
Current time
Wake-up timerWake-up timeProgramme numberDaily
Select the line marked Return to return to the previousmenu.
00 : 00
11 : 28
07 : 0701 BBC1
Daily viewing
13
Time
You can use this menu to switch yourtelevision on or off automatically at a settime.
Display the SUMMARY using the key onthe remote control. Select the line markedTime. Validate using . The TIME menu isdisplayed.
Sleep timer :Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long youwish to view before the television switches off.The television will switch off automatically at theend of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00.
One minute before switching off, a message willinform you that the television is about to go off.If you wish to keep it on, press any key on theremote control or the local keyboard.The television switches to Child lock mode afteran automatic stop. It can only be switched onagain from the remote control.
Current time :The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manuallyusing the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control.
Wake-up timer :
If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the televisionclock to the correct time (see above).
Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu.
The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on theline marked Wake-up timer.
Wake-up time :Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken.
Programme number :Select the programme you wish to be woken by.
Daily :Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day.
Exit the menu using .
Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the televisionflashes.The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not usethe remote control.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
LIST
Exit01 BBC 102 BBC 203 FR 304 CC1905 ARTE TV06 M607 CNN08 PREM09 EURO
Page -/+Programme: 0 - 9
Daily viewing
14
List of Channels
This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends onthe number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the listindicates the station name or type and the programme number. The3 AV programmes are listed on page 11.
To display the list, press the key on the remote controlorDisplay the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select theline marked List. Validate using .
The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching.It is identified in the list by the symbol TV.To display the next page, press the Right key.To display the previous page, press the Left key.
If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed:Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on theremote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected.
Or,- Select the programme using the Up/Down keys.- Validate using .- Exit the menu using .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Daily viewing
15
Selecting ProgrammesFor channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. Forprogramme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now usethe number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit.
If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only selectprogrammes 1 to 9.
Scrolling the Programmes
You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys.
Audio-visual (AV) Programmes
Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual(AV) programmes on the screen.
Volume Control
Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume.
Muting the Sound
Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound.
Zoom(16/9 models only)
This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen).Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position:
ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides).FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen.ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures.
Displaying Information
Press the key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, typeof sound.
Television LockYou can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on thetelevision set.
The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases:- If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds,- After a programmed stop,- If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set.
When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing.The television can now only be operated from the remote control.To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control.
Switching Off the TelevisionTo switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on thetelevision set.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
Teletext
16
Teletext
Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services.The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme toanother (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext).
Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100).
A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service.To call up a page:Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170).After a moment, the page appears.Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page.
Standard Functions
Rolling pages:Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received.To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using . Press again to continuescrolling.
Masked text:To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validateusing . Press again to hide the answers.
Zoom :Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice tomagnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normaldisplay.
Display:You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys thenvalidate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display.
Sub-code:You can use this to access a sub-page directly.Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number.
Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example:for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the televisionon the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page.
Index:To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using .
Direct access:You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen.
Fastext functions:If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to selectfrom the 4 headings according to its colour.To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour.
Toptext functions:If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject.You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading bypressing the yellow key.
Other functions:With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as wellas certain news flash updates.The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index.Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture.The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the key.
To exit Teletext, press or .
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr
GB
* on models equipped with this function
* on models equipped with this function
Other Connections
17
Other Connections
The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided toconnect a VHS or 8mm camcorder.
The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connecta S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder.
To use the appliance you have connected, press thekey several times until the AV3 programme is
selected on the screen. When you switch off theconnected appliance, the television will remain onthe AV3 programme and you must use the numericalkeys on the remote control to select a programme.
The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect aheadphone or earphones.
Connecting headphones mute the sound from thetelevision loudspeakers.
Other PossibilitiesCopying a cassette:Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socketAV2.Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: intothe peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacksfor a camcorder (see table below).
PLAY RECORD CALLAppliance SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket
CALLPROGRAMME
VCRPeripheral
AV1
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV1
CamcorderCinches or
S-VideoAV3
VCRou
CamcorderAV2 AV3
Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifierIf you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into theperipheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead.
www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr